Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those
above call attention to an item in the illustration.
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or
serious personal injury. To avoid or
reduce the risk, the procedures must
be followed precisely.
Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
ents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm.
SIC0697
CAUTION
If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not
do this” or “Do not let this happen”.
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed care-
fully.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-
SORY
If you see a symbol similar to those above in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to the front
of the vehicle.
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
teries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Per-
chlorate Material - special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those
above indicate movement or action.
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTH® is
a
trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to Visteon
Corporation.
XM Radio® requires subscrip-
tion, sold separately after first
90 days. Not available in Alaska,
Hawaii or Guam. For more in-
formation, visit www.xmradio.
com.
C
* 2009 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or
by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-
copying, recording or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,
Ltd.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE
PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES ...
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you
would like to provide NISSAN directly with
comments or questions, please contact the
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using
our toll-free number:
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for
the following information:
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
—
—
Your name, address, and telephone number
Vehicle identification number (attached to
the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
—
Date of purchase
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
—
Current odometer reading
Your NISSAN dealer’s name
Your comments or questions
—
—
OR
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of
Illustrated table of contents
0
1
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Starting and driving
3
4
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Technical and consumer information
8
9
Index
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 Illustrated table of contents
Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint
Cockpit............................................................ 0-7
System (SRS) ................................................... 0-2
Exterior front ..................................................... 0-3
Exterior rear ...................................................... 0-4
Instrument panel ................................................ 0-8
Meters and gauges............................................. 0-9
Engine compartment ......................................... 0-10
MR18DE engine .......................................... 0-10
¯
Exterior (Krom models) ........................................ 0-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
10. Seat belt with pretensioners (P.1-56)
11. Rear seats* (P.1-4)
— Child restraints (P.1-23)
12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
system* (P.1-24)
*: except for Cargo Van models
SSI0659
1. Supplemental front-impact air bags (Page 1-44)
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
air bags (P.1-44)
2. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bags (P.1-44)
6. Rear headrests* (P.1-9)
3. Seat belts (P.1-12)
7. Rear center seat belt* (P.1-20)
4. Head restraints (P.1-6)
8. Occupant classification sensors (weight sensors)
— Advanced Air Bag System (P.1-50)
— Front-seat Active Head Restraints (P.1-9)
9. Front seats (P.1-3)
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR FRONT
6. Fog lights*
— Switch operation (P.2-27)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
7. License plate installation (P.9-11)
8. Recovery hook (P.6-15)
9. Tires
— Wheels and tires (P.8-28, P.9-7)
— Flat tire (P.6-2)
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(P.2-13, P.5-3)
10. Side turn signal lights
— Switch operation (P.2-26)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
11. Doors
— Keys (P.3-2)
— Door locks (P.3-4)
— Remote keyless entry system* (P.3-6)
— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-10)
— Security system (P.2-17)
12. Child safety rear door lock (P.3-6)
*: if so equipped
SSI0559
1. Hood (P.3-21)
3. Windshield wiper and washer
— Switch operation (P.2-20)
— Blade replacement (P.8-17)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-12)
2. Headlights and turn signal lights
— Switch operation (P.2-23)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)
4. Outside mirrors (P.3-27)
5. Power windows (P.2-36)
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR REAR
9. Fuel-filler door
— Operation (P.3-24)
— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)
*: if so equipped
SSI0660
1. Rear window wiper and washer
— Switch operation (P.2-22)
4. Rear window defroster (P.2-23)
5. Back door (P.3-22)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-12)
— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-10)
2. High-mounted stop light
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
6. Rear combination lights
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
3. Antenna (P.4-42)
7. Rearview camera* (P.4-2)
— Satellite radio antenna* (P.4-14)
8. Spare tire (under the vehicle) (P.6-4)
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
¯
EXTERIOR (Krom models)
¯
For Krom models, the vehicle parts listed below
require special care or caution. Refer to addi-
tional information in each section.
1. Side sill extensions (P.3-23)
2. Aluminum alloy wheels (P.7-4)
3. Front bumper (P.3-23, P.6-14)
4. Rear spoiler (P.7-3)
5. Rear bumper (P.3-23, P.6-14)
SSI0577
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
9. Map lights* (P.2-38)
10. Inside rearview mirror (P.3-26)
11. Cargo area
— Luggage hooks (P.2-34)
— Cargo light* (P.2-40)
12. Rear cup holders* (P.2-31)
13. Front cup holders (P.2-31)
*: if so equipped
SSI0634
1. Rear pillar pocket (P.2-34)
2. Soft bottle holders (P.2-33)
3. Ceiling light (P.2-39)
6. Door armrest
— Power window switch (P.2-36)
— Power door lock switch (P.3-5)
7. Microphone*
4. Utility hooks* (P.2-35)
5. Jack and tools (P.6-3)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System*
(P.4-44)
8. Sun visors (P.3-26)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COCKPIT
7. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
(P.5-28)
8. Tilting steering wheel lever (P.3-25)
9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)*
— Audio control* (P.4-41)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control*
(P.4-44)
10. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)*
— Cruise control switches* (P.5-20)
11. Selector lever or Shift lever
— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
(P.5-14)
— Manual Transmission (MT) (P.5-18)
12. Parking brake (P.5-20)
*: if so equipped
SSI0563
1. Front cup holders (P.2-31)
3. Steering wheel
— Electric power steering system (P.5-25)
— Horn (P.2-28)
— Driver’s supplemental air bag (P.1-44)
2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch
— Headlight (P.2-23)
— Turn signal light (P.2-26)
— Fog light* (P.2-27)
4. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-20)
5. Fuse box cover (P.8-21)
6. Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-27)
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Push-button ignition switch (models with Intelli-
gent Key system) (P.5-9)
12. Heater and air conditioner* control (P.4-6)
— Rear window and outside mirror* defroster
switch (P.2-23)
13. Utility hooks* (P.2-35)
14. iPod® connector* (P.4-15)/USB connector*
(P.4-17)
15. Power outlet (P.2-31)
16. Glove box (P.2-33)
*: if so equipped
SSI0562
6. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-51)
1. Side ventilator (P.4-5)
2. Meters and gauges (P.2-4)
3. Center ventilator (P.4-5)
7. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-44)
8. Fuel-filler door release handle (P.3-24)
9. Hood release handle (P.3-21)
4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-27)
5. Audio system* (P.4-13)
— Clock* (P.2-28)
10. Ignition switch (models without Intelligent Key
system) (P.5-7)
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
METERS AND GAUGES
9. RESET switch for trip odometer (P.2-5)/Trip
computer mode switch (P.2-8)
*: if so equipped
SIC4119
1. Tachometer (P.2-6)
5. Speedometer (P.2-5)
2. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-6)
6. Warning/indicator lights (P.2-10)
3. Vehicle information display (P.2-7)
— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-5)
— Trip computer (P.2-8)
7. Instrument brightness control knob (P.2-26)
8. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-
tion indicator* (P.2-8)
— Outside air temperature* (P.2-7)
4. Fuel gauge (P.2-7)
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
*
Shown with the resonator removed. For removal
instructions, see “ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CHECK LOCATIONS” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.
*1: for Manual Transmission (MT) models
SSI0564
5. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-12)
6. Engine drive belt location (P.8-15)
7. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-9)
MR18DE ENGINE*
1. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-9)
2. Brake and clutch (*1) fluid reservoir (P.8-11)
3. Air cleaner (P.8-16)
8. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8)
9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-7)
— Vehicle overheat (P.6-11)
4. Battery (P.8-13)
— Jump starting (P.6-8)
10. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-20)
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-
mental restraint system
Seats .............................................................. 1-2
Front seats ................................................... 1-3
Rear seats (if so equipped) .............................. 1-4
Head restraints.............................................. 1-6
Seat belts ...................................................... 1-12
Precautions on seat belt usage ....................... 1-12
Child safety ................................................ 1-15
Pregnant women.......................................... 1-16
Injured persons............................................ 1-16
Three-point type seat belt .............................. 1-16
Seat belt extenders....................................... 1-22
Seat belt maintenance................................... 1-22
Child restraints ................................................ 1-23
Precautions on child restraints......................... 1-23
Child restraint installation using LATCH
(except for Cargo Van models) ........................ 1-28
Child restraint installation using the seat belts..... 1-33
Booster seats.................................................. 1-39
Booster seat installation on front passenger seat
and rear seat............................................... 1-41
Supplemental restraint system............................. 1-44
Precautions on supplemental restraint system ..... 1-44
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats) ................................................ 1-50
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag systems ......................... 1-54
Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ......... 1-56
Supplemental air bag warning labels................. 1-57
Supplemental air bag warning light................... 1-57
Repair and replacement procedure................... 1-58
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System
(LATCH) (except for Cargo Van models)............ 1-24
Top tether strap child restraint......................... 1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS
.
The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when
the passenger sits well back and
straight up in the seat. If the seat-
back is reclined, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and being injured
is increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
SSS0133
well back in the seat with both feet
on the floor and adjust the seat
properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON
SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this
section.
WARNING
.
Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined. This
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt
will not be against your body. In an
accident, you could be thrown into it
and receive neck or other serious
injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
internal injuries.
.
.
After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely
locked.
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.
.
For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0793
SSS0792
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE” later in this section.) Also, the seatback
can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in
the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with
the parking brake fully applied.
Seat lifter (for driver’s seat):
FRONT SEATS
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
adjust the seat height until the desired position
is achieved.
Front manual seat adjustment
Forward and backward:
1
Pull the lever
up and hold it while you slide
*
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the lever to lock the seat in
position.
Reclining:
2
To recline the seatback, pull the lever
up and
*
lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull
the lever up and lean your body forward. Release
the lever to lock the seatback in position.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(except for Cargo Van models)” later in this
section.)
SSS0961
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE” later in this section.)
REAR SEATS (if so equipped)
Forward and backward
1
Pull the lever
up and hold it while you slide
*
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the lever to lock the seat in
position.
Folding
Before folding the rear seats:
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the strap
lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull
the strap up and lean your body forward.
Release the strap to lock the seatback in
position.
.
Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks
on the side wall. (See “Seat belt hooks
(except for Cargo Van models)” later in this
section.)
2
*
and
.
Release the connector tongue of the rear
center seat belt from the buckle, and secure
the connector and seat belt tongues on the
seat belt hook. (See “Rear center seat belt
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
avoid injury to yourself and others:
.
Make sure that the seat path is clear
before moving the seat.
.
The seatback is spring assisted and
may move at a rapid rate. Be careful
not to allow the seatback to pinch or
hit any part of your body when you
fold it.
To return the seatback to the seating position, lift
up each seatback and push it to the upright
position until it is latched. Unstow the seat belt
buckles by pulling the buckles out of the seat
pockets.
SSS0987
.
Stow seat belt buckles by pushing the seat
belt buckles into seat pockets.
WARNING
The seat belt buckles should only be stowed
when the rear seat is folded. The rear seat belt
buckles should be in the unstowed position at all
other times.
.
Do not use the rear seat belts when
the buckles are stowed in the seat
pockets. Failure to do so may re-
duce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an
accident.
SSS0962
To fold down the seatback of each rear seat, pull
1
*
2
*
the strap
or
.
.
.
Do not fold down the rear seats
when occupants are in the rear seat
area or any objects are on the rear
seats.
CAUTION
When folding or returning the
seatback(s) to the upright position, to
Never allow anyone to ride in the
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
cargo area or on the rear seats
when they are in the fold-down
position. Use of these areas by
passengers without proper re-
straints could result in serious injury
in an accident or sudden stop.
this section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not
attach anything to the head restraint
stalks or remove the head restraint. Do
not use the seat if the head restraint
has been removed. If the head restraint
was removed, reinstall and properly
adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions
can reduce the effectiveness of the
head restraints. This may increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.
.
.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from
sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unse-
cured cargo could cause personal
injury.
SSS1019
When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched
position. If they are not completely
secured, passengers may be injured
in an accident or sudden stop.
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints. The head re-
straints are adjustable.
Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a head restraint.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other
vehicle safety systems. They may pro-
vide additional protection against injury
in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the
head restraints properly, as specified in
1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0992
SSS0997
SSS0993
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
Components
Adjustment
1. Head restraint
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of your ears.
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0994
SSS0995
SSS0996
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint down.
Removal
Install
Use the following procedure to remove the
adjustable head restraints.
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes
in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint
is facing the correct direction. The stalk with
1
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
the adjustment notches
must be in-
*
2
stalled in the hole with the lock knob
.
*
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure
place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint before an occupant uses the
seating position.
1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as
described in this section.
ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTS (if so
equipped)
WARNING
The adjustable headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end colli-
sions. Adjust the headrest properly, as
specified in this section. Check the
adjustment after someone else uses
the seat. Do not attach anything to the
adjustable headrest stalks or remove
the adjustable headrest. Do not use the
seat if the adjustable headrest has
been removed. If the adjustable head-
rest was removed, reinstall and prop-
erly adjust the headrest before an
occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions
can reduce the effectiveness of the
adjustable headrests. This may in-
crease the risk of serious injury or
death in a collision.
SSS0508
SSS1048
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with adjustable headrests.
Front-seat Active Head Restraints
The Active Head Restraint moves forward
utilizing the force that the seatback receives
from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The
movement of the head restraint helps support
the occupant’s head by reducing its backward
movement and helping absorb some of the
forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Indicates the seating position is equipped
with an adjustable headrest.
Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-
sions at low to medium speeds in which it is said
that whiplash injury occurs most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original positions.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS1034
SSS0997
SSS1035
To raise the headrest, pull it up.
Components
Adjustment
1. Adjustable headrest
Adjust the headrest so the center is level with
the center of your ears.
2. Adjustment notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS1036
SSS1037
SSS1038
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the headrest down.
Removal
Install
Use the following procedure to remove the
adjustable headrests.
1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in
the seat. Make sure that the headrest is
facing the correct direction. The stalk with
1
1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
the adjustment notch
must be installed
*
2
in the hole with the lock knob
.
*
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
3. Remove the headrest from the seat.
headrest down.
4. Store the headrest properly in a secure
place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
3. Properly adjust the headrest before an
occupant uses the seating position.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrest
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well
back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your
chances of being injured or killed in an accident
and/or the severity of injury may be greatly
reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and
all of your passengers to buckle up every time
you drive, even if your seating position includes a
supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.
SSS0970
SSS0963
Rear
ARMREST (if so equipped)
Front
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.
1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0136
SSS0016
SSS0134
SSS0014
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Be sure the seat belt tongue is
securely fastened to the proper
buckle.
activated, it cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
retractor. See a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
.
.
Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat and,
if appropriate, in a child restraint.
Do not wear the seat belt inside out
or twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
.
.
Removal and installation of the
pretensioner system components
should be done by a NISSAN dealer.
.
.
.
Do not allow more than one person
to use the same seat belt.
All seat belt assemblies, including
retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any colli-
sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN
recommends that all seat belt as-
semblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was
minor and the belts show no da-
mage and continue to operate prop-
erly. Seat belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be
inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is
noted.
The seat belt should be properly
adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do
so may reduce the effectiveness of
the entire restraint system and in-
crease the chance or severity of
injury in an accident. Serious injury
or death can occur if the seat belt is
not worn properly.
Never carry more people in the
vehicle than there are seat belts.
If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and
all seat belts fastened, it may in-
dicate a malfunction in the system.
Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
.
.
Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your
chest. Never put the belt behind
your back, under your arm or across
your neck. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder.
.
No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do
not modify the seat belt, add mate-
rial, or install devices that may
change the seat belt routing or
tension. Doing so may affect the
operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the
seat belt system may result in
serious personal injury.
.
All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the
restraint manufacturer’s inspection
instructions and replacement re-
commendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.
Position the lap belt as low and
snug as possible AROUND THE
HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt
worn too high could increase the
risk of internal injuries in an acci-
dent.
.
Once a seat belt pretensioner has
1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD SAFETY
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use.
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly
fitting seat belt could cause serious or
fatal injury. Always use appropriate
child restraints.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
Small children
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placed in a front-facing
child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-
mends that small children be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-
lation and use.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. (See
“CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.)
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
Also, there are other types of child restraints
available for larger children for additional pro-
tection.
.
.
.
Rear-facing child restraint
Front-facing child restraint
Booster seat
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in rear-
facing child restraints. Front-facing child re-
straints are available for children who outgrow
rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1
year old. Booster seats are used to help position
a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a front-facing child restraint.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat
belts which are provided. The seat belt may not
fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and
80 lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
obtain proper seat belt fit.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (air bag system) for the front passen-
ger. (See “SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM” later in this section.)
Infants
WARNING
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
mends that infants be placed in child restraints
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
commercially available booster seat if the
shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits
Infants and children need special pro-
tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of
the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The
booster seat should raise the child so that the
shoulder belt is properly positioned across the
top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap
belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only
be used in seating positions that have a three-
point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit
the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. Once the child has grown so the
shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face
and neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.
your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for
specific recommendations.
properly.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. (See “SEATS” earlier in this
section.)
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with
your doctor for specific recommendations.
2. Make sure rear seat belt buckles are
removed from the stowed position. See
“Rear seat belt buckles (except for Cargo
Van models)” later in this section.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WARNING
.
.
Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times.
Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined. This
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt
will not be against your body. In an
accident, you could be thrown into it
and receive neck or other serious
injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
internal injuries.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo areas while the vehicle is moving.
The child could be seriously injured or
killed in an accident or sudden stop.
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,
and always position the lap belt as low as
possible around the hips, not the waist. Place
the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across
your chest. Never put the lap/shoulder belt over
.
For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
well back in the seat with both feet
on the floor and adjust the seat belt
1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
allow the driver and passengers some freedom
of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat
belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for
child restraint installation.
When ALR mode is activated the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional
information, see “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in
this section.
SSS0292
SSS0290
3. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
4. Position the lap belt portion low and snug
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is
activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension.
on the hips as shown.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
.
The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
belt to move and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
WARNING
.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.
When fastening the seat belts, be
certain that seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.
.
.
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat
belt movement by two separate methods:
.
When the belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
.
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
SSS0326
SSS0987
.
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and
restrict further belt movement.
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the
buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.
Rear seat belt buckles (except for Cargo
Van models)
The rear seat belt buckles can be stowed by
pushing the buckles into the pockets of the seat
cushion when the rear seatback is folded. The
buckles should only be stowed when the seat-
back is folded. At all other times the seat belt
buckles must be pulled out of the pockets in the
unstowed position.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any question about seat belt
operation, see a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
Do not use the rear seat belts when the
buckles are stowed in the seat pockets.
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
.
.
After adjustment, release the ad-
justment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down
to make sure it is securely fixed in
position.
The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident.
SSS0351A
SSS0964
Shoulder belt height adjustment (for front
seats)
Seat belt hooks (except for Cargo Van
models)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. (See
“PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE”
earlier in this section.)
When the rear seat belts are not in use and
when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear
outer seat belts on the seat belt hooks.
The hook for the rear center seat belt is located
on the left wall behind the rear seat. (See “Rear
center seat belt (except for Cargo Van models)”
later in this section for details.)
1
To adjust, pull the adjustment button
, and
*
then move the shoulder belt anchor to the
2
desired position
, so that the belt passes
*
over the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling
off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment
button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into
position.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0391
SSS0241
SSS0703
The center seat belt buckle and the tongue are
identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat
belt tongue can be fastened only into the center
seat belt buckle.
Rear center seat belt (except for Cargo
Van models)
The rear center seat belt has a connector tongue
WARNING
.
.
Always fasten the connector tongue
and the seat belt in the order shown.
1
2
and a seat belt tongue
. Both the
*
*
connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must
be securely latched for proper seat belt opera-
tion.
Always make sure both the connec-
tor tongue and the seat belt tongue
are secured when using the seat
belt or installing a child restraint. Do
not use the seat belt or child
restraint with only the seat belt
tongue attached. This could result
in serious personal injury in case of
an accident or a sudden stop.
1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stowing rear center seat belt:
When folding down the rear seat, the rear center
seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position
as follows:
1
1. Hold the connector tongue
so that the
*
seat belt does not retract suddenly when the
tongue is released from the connector
1
buckle. Release the connector tongue
*
2
by inserting a suitable tool such as key
*
into the connector buckle.
2. Retract the seat belt and secure the seat
belt tongue and connector tongue on the
3
*
seat belt hook
.
WARNING
.
.
Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
When returning the seatback, be
sure to attach the rear center seat
belt connector.
SSS0966
Attaching rear center seat belt:
Always be sure the rear center seat belt
connector tongue and connector buckle are
attached. Disconnect only when folding down
the rear seat.
SSS0965
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
To connect the buckle:
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8
in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either
the driver or front passenger seating position.
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with
purchasing an extender if an extender is
required.
.
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
1. Remove the seat belt tongue and connector
1
*
tongue from the seat belt hook
.
2. Pull the seat belt and secure the connector
2
*
buckle until it clicks
.
The rear center seat belt connector tongue can
be attached only into the rear center seat belt
connector buckle.
.
.
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat
belts” earlier in this section.
WARNING
Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt
assembly should be replaced.
WARNING
.
.
.
Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.
.
.
When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the
seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position and the rear
center seat belt connector is com-
pletely secured.
Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal
injury in the event of an accident.
If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured
in the correct position, serious per-
sonal injury may result in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
Never use seat belt extenders to
install child restraints. If the child
restraint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured in a
collision or a sudden stop.
1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
seat. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat. If you must install a
front-facing child restraint in the
front seat, see “CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS” later in this section.
WARNING
.
.
Infants and small children should
always be placed in an appropriate
child restraint while riding in the
vehicle. Failure to use a child re-
straint can result in serious injury or
death.
.
.
Improper use or improper installa-
tion of a child restraint can increase
the risk or severity of injury for both
the child and other occupants of the
vehicle and can lead to serious
injury or death in an accident.
Infants and small children should
never be carried on your lap. It is not
possible for even the strongest
adult to resist the forces of a severe
accident. The child could be crushed
between the adult and parts of the
vehicle. Also, do not put the same
seat belt around both your child and
yourself.
SSS0099
Follow all of the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for in-
stallation and use. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure to select
one which will fit your child and
vehicle. It may not be possible to
properly install some types of child
restraints in your vehicle.
.
.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child. A
rear-facing child restraint must only
be used in the rear seat.
.
.
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision or a sudden
stop greatly increases.
Child restraint anchor points are
designed to withstand only those
NISSAN recommends that the child
restraint be installed in the rear
SSS0100
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
CAUTION
.
.
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s
seat and seat belt system.
Remember that a child restraint left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot.
Check the seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the child
restraint.
.
.
Adjustable seatbacks should be
positioned to fit the child restraint,
but as upright as possible.
If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
After attaching the child restraint,
test it before you place the child in
it. Push it from side to side while
holding the seat near the LATCH
attachment or near the seat belt
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the belt holds the
restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the belt as
necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You
may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System
or LATCH. Some child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to these lower anchors. For
details, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren System (LATCH) (except for Cargo
Van models)” later in this section.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on front-facing child
restraints be secured to the designated
anchor point on the vehicle.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
(See “CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING THE SEAT BELTS” later in this section.)
In general, child restraints are also designed to
be installed with a lap/shoulder seat belt.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
System (LATCH) (except for Cargo Van
models)
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and small children of various sizes. When
selecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compa-
tible child restraints. This system may also be
referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible
system. With this system, you do not have to use
a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.
.
When your child restraint is not in
use, keep it secured with the LATCH
system or a seat belt to prevent it
from being thrown around in case of
a sudden stop or accident.
.
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the rear outboard seating
positions only. Do not attempt to install a child
restraint in the center position using the LATCH
anchors.
LATCH lower anchor point locations
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of
the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH anchors.
WARNING
.
Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration. If a child
restraint is not secured properly,
your child could be seriously injured
or killed in an accident.
SSS0801
LATCH system anchor location
.
.
Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using
the LATCH anchors. The child re-
straint will not be secured properly.
Child restraint anchor points are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
SSS0637
LATCH system lower anchor
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE-
STRAINT
If the manufacturer of your child restraint
requires the use of a top tether strap, it must
be secured to an anchor point.
WARNING
.
.
Child restraint anchor points are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
SSS0643
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
SSS0644
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
If the cargo cover contacts the top
tether strap when it is attached to
the top tether anchor, remove the
cargo cover from the vehicle or
secure it on the cargo floor below
its attachment location. If the cargo
cover is not removed, it may da-
mage the top tether strap during a
collision. Your child could be ser-
iously injured or killed in a collision
if the child restraint top tether strap
is damaged.
LATCH child restraints generally require the use
of a top tether strap. (See “TOP TETHER
STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT” later in this section
for installation instructions.)
Installing child restraint LATCH anchor
attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this
system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint. Check your
child restraint for a label stating that it is
compatible with LATCH system. This information
may also be in the instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer.
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint. (See
“CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH (except for Cargo Van models)” later in
this section.)
.
Do not allow cargo to contact the
top tether strap when it is attached
to the top tether anchor. Properly
1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
secure the cargo so it does not
contact the top tether strap. Cargo
that is not properly secured or that
contacts the top tether strap may
damage the top tether strap during
a collision. Your child could be
seriously injured or killed in a colli-
sion if the child restraint top tether
strap is damaged.
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located in the following
locations.
SSS0986
SSS0967
.
.
On the seat cushion behind the outboard
and center seating positions (except for
Cargo Van models)
Rear seats (except for Cargo Van models):
WARNING
1. Position the top tether strap over the top of
the seatback and under the headrest.
On the floor behind the front passenger seat
(Cargo Van models)
Do not attach upper tether anchors to
the luggage hooks. The child restraint
will not be properly installed. Your child
could be injured or killed in a sudden
stop or collision.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
on the seat directly behind the child
restraint.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
Installing top tether strap
First secure the child restraint with the LATCH
system (except for Cargo Van models: rear
outboard seating positions only) or the seat belt
as applicable.
For the best child restraint fit, see the child
restraint installation instructions in this section
and the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap child restraint on the rear
seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-
tails.
For the best child restraint fit, see the child
restraint installation instructions in this section
and the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap child restraint on the front
passenger’s seat, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING LATCH (except for Cargo Van
models)
SSS1039
WARNING
.
Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown. For the LATCH lower anchor
locations, see “Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren System
(LATCH) (except for Cargo Van mod-
els)” earlier in this section. If a child
restraint is not secured properly,
your child could be seriously injured
or killed in an accident.
Front passenger seat (Cargo Van models):
For the front passenger seat in Cargo Van
models, install the top tether strap according to
the following procedure.
1. Adjust the head restraint to its highest
position.
2. Route the top tether strap between the head
restraint and the top of the seatback.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point on the floor behind the seat.
.
The LATCH anchors are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstance are they to
be used for adult seat belts or
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
harnesses.
.
Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
ing your fingers into the lower
anchor area and feeling to make
sure there are no obstructions over
the LATCH anchors, such as seat
belt webbing or seat cushion mate-
rial. The child restraint will not be
secured properly if the LATCH an-
chors are obstructed.
Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
restraint using LATCH system:
SSS0645
Front-facing (webbing-mounted) — step 3
SSS0646
Front-facing (rigid-mounted) — step 3
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is
properly attached to the lower anchors.
1. Adjust the rear seat to the upright and
rearmost position.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the seatback.
If necessary, remove the headrest to obtain
the correct child restraint fit. (See “ADJUS-
TABLE HEADRESTS” earlier in this sec-
tion.)
If the headrest is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
headrest when the child restraint is re-
moved. If the seating position does not have
a removal headrest and it is interfering with
the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.
SSS0647
SSS0638
Front-facing — step 5
Front-facing — step 7
5. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the seat near the
LATCH attachment path. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm)
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment holds
the restraint in place. If the restraint is not
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as
necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
6. If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD
RESTRAINT” earlier in this section.)
1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 7.
Rear-facing
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using LATCH system:
1. Adjust the rear seat to the upright and
rearmost position.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
SSS0648
Rear-facing (webbing-mounted) — step 3
SSS0649
Rear-facing (rigid-mounted) — step 3
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is
properly attached to the lower anchors.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 5.
SSS0639
SSS0650
Rear-facing — step 4
Rear-facing — step 5
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the seat near the
LATCH attachment path. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm)
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment holds
the restraint in place. If the restraint is not
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as
necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, if you must install a front-
facing child restraint in the front
passenger seat, move the passen-
ger seat to the rearmost position.
Also, be sure the front passenger air
bag status light is illuminated to
indicate the passenger air bag is
OFF. See “Front passenger air bag
and status light” later in this section
for details.
.
A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat (except for Cargo
Van models).
The instructions in this section apply to child
restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts
in the rear seat or the front passenger seat.
.
.
The three-point seat belt in your
vehicle is equipped with an Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which
must be used when installing a child
restraint.
SSS0100
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING THE SEAT BELTS
Failure to use the ALR mode will
result in the child restraint not being
properly secured. The restraint
could tip over or otherwise be un-
secured and cause injury to the child
in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING
.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
passenger seat. Front air bags in-
flate with great force. A rear-facing
child restraint could be struck by the
front air bag in a crash and could
seriously injure or kill your child.
.
When using the rear center seat belt
to install a child restraint, make sure
the connector tongue and the seat
belt tongue are secured. Do not use
the seat belt with only the seat belt
tongue attached. This could result in
serious personal injury in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
.
NISSAN recommends that child re-
straints be installed in the rear seat.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the seatback.
If necessary, adjust the head restraint (front
passenger seat only) or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINTS”
earlier in this section and “ADJUSTABLE
HEADRESTS” earlier in this section.)
If the head restraint/headrest is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when the child
restraint is removed.
SSS0640
Front-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1
SSS0360B
Front-facing — step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for belt routing.
Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear
seat (except for Cargo Van models) or in the
front passenger seat:
If the seating position does not have a
removable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
1. Adjust the rear seat to the upright and
rearmost position.
If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
front-facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.
1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0651
SSS0652
SSS0653
Front-facing — step 4
Front-facing — step 5
Front-facing — step 6
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD
RESTRAINT” earlier in this section.) Do not
install child restraints that require the use of
a top tether strap to seating positions that
do not have a top tether anchor.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt
webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is
in the ALR mode.
10. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 9.
SSS0641
SSS0481
Front-facing — step 8
Front-facing — step 11
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the seat near the
seat belt path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to
side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as
necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
11. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light
should illuminate. If this
light is not illuminated, see “Front passenger
air bag and status light” later in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child
restraint mode) is canceled.
1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0100
SSS0654
SSS0655
Rear-facing — step 2
Rear-facing — step 3
Rear-facing
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for belt routing.
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear
seat (except for Cargo Van models):
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat.
Adjust the rear seat to the upright and
rearmost position. Position the child restraint
on the seat. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0656
SSS0657
SSS0658
Rear-facing — step 4
Rear-facing — step 5
Rear-facing — step 6
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
5. Remove any additional slack from the child
restraint; press downward and rearward
firmly in the center of the child restraint with
your hand to compress the vehicle seat
cushion and seatback while pulling up on
the seat belt.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the seat near the
seat belt path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to
side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as
necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOOSTER SEATS
7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat
belt webbing out of the retractor, the
retractor is in the ALR mode.
between the adult and parts of the
vehicle. Also, do not put the same
seat belt around both your child and
yourself.
.
NISSAN recommends that the boos-
ter seat be installed in the rear seat.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat. If you must install a
booster seat in the front seat, see
“BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT AND
REAR SEAT” later in this section.
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 7.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
SSS0099
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS
.
.
.
A booster seat must only be in-
stalled in a seating position that has
a lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a
three-point type seat belt with a
booster seat can result in a serious
injury in sudden stop or collision.
WARNING
.
.
Infants and small children should
always be placed in an appropriate
child restraint while riding in the
vehicle. Failure to use a child re-
straint or booster seat can result in
serious injury or death.
Improper use or improper installa-
tion of a booster seat can increase
the risk or severity of injury for both
the child and other occupants of the
vehicle and can lead to serious
injury or death in an accident.
Infants and small children should
never be carried on your lap. It is not
possible for even the strongest
adult to resist the forces of a severe
accident. The child could be crushed
Do not use towels, books, pillows or
other items in place of a booster
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
seat. Items such as these may move
during normal driving or a collision
and result in serious injury or death.
Booster seats are designed to be
used with a lap/shoulder belt. Boos-
ter seats are designed to properly
route the lap and shoulder portions
of the seat belt over the strongest
portions of a child’s body to provide
the maximum protection during a
collision.
make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the abdomen.
.
.
Do not put the shoulder belt behind
the child or under the child’s arm. If
you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, see “BOOSTER SEAT
INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSEN-
GER SEAT AND REAR SEAT” later in
this section.
.
.
Follow all of the booster seat man-
ufacturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use. When purchasing a
booster seat, be sure to select one
which will fit your child and vehicle.
It may not be possible to properly
install some types of booster seats
in your vehicle.
When your booster seat is not in
use, keep it secured with a seat belt
to prevent it from being thrown
around in case of a sudden stop or
accident.
LRS0455
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
.
Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
CAUTION
If the booster seat and seat belt is
not used properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision or a
sudden stop greatly increases.
Remember that a booster seat left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot.
Check the seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the booster
seat.
.
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
.
.
Adjustable seatbacks should be
positioned to fit the booster seat,
but as upright as possible.
After placing the child in the booster
seat and fastening the seat belt,
1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT AND REAR
SEAT
WARNING
NISSAN recommends that booster
seats be installed in the rear seat.
However, if you must install a booster
seat in the front passenger seat, move
the passenger’s seat to the rearmost
position.
LRS0453
LRS0464
CAUTION
.
Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
1
.
If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with
your child. Always follow all recommended
procedures.
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
when using a booster seat with the
seat belts.
low back booster seat
is chosen, the
*
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
2
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
high back booster seat
should be used.
*
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0640
LRS0451
LRS0452
Front passenger seat
Rear center position
Rear outboard position
1. Adjust the rear seat to the upright and
rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
If necessary, adjust the head restraint (front
passenger seat only) or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
booster seat fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINTS”
earlier in this section and “ADJUSTABLE
HEADRESTS” earlier in this section.)
If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rear-
most position.
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If the head restraint/headrest is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when the boos-
ter seat is removed.
If the seating position does not have a
removable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in the “THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT
BELT” earlier in this section.
LRS0454
SSS0481
Front passenger seat
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions for adjusting the seat belt
routing.
status light
may or may not be
illuminated depending on the size of the
child and the type of booster seat used.
(See “Front passenger air bag and status
light” later in this section.)
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
cushion the impact force to the head of
occupants in front and rear outboard seating
positions in certain side impact collisions. The
curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the
side where the vehicle is impacted.
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
section contains important information concern-
ing the following systems:
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection
provided by the driver and passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the
occupant seated a suitable distance away from
the steering wheel, instrument panel and door
finishers. (See “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this
section for instructions and precautions on seat
belt usage.)
.
Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
.
.
.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag
Seat belt with pretensioner
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head and
chest of the driver and front passenger in certain
frontal collisions.
After the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the systems are operational.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic
area of the driver and front passenger in certain
side impact collisions. The side air bag is
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle
is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
.
The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower se-
verity frontal collision. Always wear
your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.
.
.
The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag
status light is lit or if the front
passenger seat is unoccupied. See
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” later in this section.
SSS0131
The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are
sitting well back and upright in the
seat with both feet on the floor. The
front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System, if you are
unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-
ting sideways or out of position in
any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may
also receive serious or fatal injuries
from the front air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit
SSS0132
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
back against the seatback and as
far-away as practical from the steer-
ing wheel or instrument panel. Al-
ways use the seat belts.
crease the risk that they are injured
if the front air bag inflates.
.
The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with
sensors that detect if the seat belts
are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag
System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage then
inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can in-
crease the risk or severity of injury
in an accident.
SSS0007
.
The front passenger seat is
equipped with occupant classifica-
tion sensors (weight sensors) that
turn the front passenger air bag
OFF under some conditions. This
sensor is only used in this seat.
Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
.
Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could in-
SSS0006
1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
.
.
Never let children ride unrestrained
or extend their hands or face out of
the window. Do not attempt to hold
them in your lap or arms. Some
examples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the illustrations.
Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side
air bags or curtain air bags inflate if
they are not properly restrained.
Pre-teens and children should be
properly restrained in the rear seat,
if possible.
SSS0008
SSS0099
.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child.
See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in
this section for details.
SSS0009
SSS0100
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0059A
Do not lean against doors or windows.
SSS0140
SSS0159
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-
plemental air bags and roof-mounted
curtain side-impact supplemental air
bags:
.
The side air bags and curtain air
bags ordinarily will not inflate in the
event of a frontal impact, rear im-
pact, rollover or lower severity side
collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
SSS0188A
SSS0162
1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat. The side air bag
and curtain air bag inflate with great
force. Do not allow anyone to place
their hand, leg or face near the side
air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side
roof rails. Do not allow anyone
sitting in the front seats or rear
outboard seats to extend their hand
out of the window or lean against
the door. Some examples of dan-
gerous riding positions are shown
in the previous illustrations.
.
When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be espe-
cially careful with children, who
should always be properly re-
strained. Some examples of danger-
ous riding positions are shown in
the illustrations.
SSS1049
1. Crash zone sensor
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
air bags modules
2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
air bag inflators
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bag modules
.
Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.
8. Seat belt with pretensioners
9. Satellite sensors
4. Occupant classification sensors (weight sensors)
5. Occupant classification system control unit
10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-
TEM (front seats)
passenger, the occupant classification sensors
are also monitored. Based on information from
the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in
a crash, depending on the crash severity and
whether the front occupants are belted or
unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air
bag may be automatically turned OFF under
some conditions, depending on the information
provided by the occupant classification sensors.
If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the
passenger air bag status light will be illuminated
(if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be
illuminated, but the air bag will be off). (See
“Front passenger air bag and status light” later
in this section for further details.) One front air
bag inflating does not indicate improper perfor-
mance of the system.
occupant classification system is
working properly, position the occu-
pants in the rear seating positions.
WARNING
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed
to meet certification requirements under U.S.
regulations. It is also permitted in Canada.
However, all of the information, cautions
and warnings in this manual still apply and
must be followed.
To ensure proper operation of the
passenger’s advanced air bag system,
please observe the following items.
.
Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
.
Do not place heavy loads heavier
than 2.2 lb (4 kg) on the seatback,
head restraint or in the seatback
pocket.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel above the glove
box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher severity
frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain
frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is
not always an indication of proper front air bag
operation.
.
.
.
Do not store luggage behind the
seat that can press into the seat-
back.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If
you are considering modification of your vehicle
due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in
the front of this Owner’s Manual.
Confirm the operating condition
with the front passenger air bag
status light.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate
a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get fresh
air promptly.
If you notice that the front passen-
ger air bag status light is not
operating, please take your vehicle
to your NISSAN dealer to check the
occupant classification system.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has
dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors
information from the Air bag Control Unit (ACU),
seat belt buckle sensors and the occupant
classification sensors (weight sensors). Inflator
operation is based on the severity of a collision
and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front
.
Until you have confirmed with your
dealer that your passenger seat
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
help to cushion the impact force on the head
and chest of the front occupants. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,
an inflating front air bag may cause facial
abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do
not provide restraint to the lower body.
Status light:
The front passenger air bag status light
located on the instrument panel. The light
operates as follows:
is
.
Unoccupied passenger seat: The
light
is OFF and the front passenger air bag is
OFF and will not inflate in a crash.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the driver
and passenger seated upright as far as practical
away from the steering wheel or instrument
panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order
to help protect the front occupants. Because of
this, the force of the front air bag inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, the air bag module during
inflation.
.
Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The
light illuminates to indi-
cate that the front passenger air bag is OFF
and will not inflate in a crash.
SSS0481
Front passenger air bag status light
.
Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meets the conditions outlined in this
Front passenger air bag and status light
section: The
light is OFF to indicate
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
that the front passenger air bag is opera-
tional.
WARNING
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
Front passenger air bag:
The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protection.
Failure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats,
seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
After the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described
below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the
front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate
in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags
in your vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
as children, by requiring the air bag to be
automatically turned OFF.
occupant classification sensors are designed to
operate as described above to turn the front
passenger air bag OFF for specified child
restraints. Failing to properly secure child
restrains and to use the Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode)
may allow the restraint to tip or move in an
accident or sudden stop. This can also result in
the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead
of being OFF. (See “CHILD RESTRAINTS”
earlier in this section for proper use and
installation.)
that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting
on the seat properly.
The occupant classification sensors (weight
sensors) are on the seat cushion frame under
the front passenger seat and are designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the seat. For
example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,
the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to
turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance
with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of
the type specified in the regulations is on the
seat, the occupant classification sensors can
detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may
not be illuminated, depending on the size of the
child and the type of child restraint being used. If
the air bag status light is not illuminated
(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a
crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure that
the child restraint is installed properly, the seat
belt is used properly and the occupant is
positioned properly. If the air bag status light is
not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child
restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object being detected by the occupant
classification sensors. Other conditions could
also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as
outlined in this manual should not cause the
passenger air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,
however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat
properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by
sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise
being out of position), this could cause the
sensors to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure
to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly
for the most effective protection by the seat belt
and supplemental air bag.
If the passenger air bag status light will not
illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is
automatically turned OFF with the seat occu-
pied. The light will not illuminate when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. However, if the
seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status
light will remain off.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate
child restraints and booster seats be properly
installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
passenger air bag status light is illuminated
(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be
1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
(hot steam cleaners) on the seat.
This can damage the seat or occu-
pant classification sensors. This can
also affect the operation of the air
bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
placing material over the steering
wheel pad and above the instrument
panel or by installing additional trim
material around the air bag system.
light
, located in the meter and gauges area,
will blink. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
.
Modifying or tampering with the
front passenger seat may result in
serious personal injury. For exam-
ple, do not change the front seats by
placing material on the seat cushion
or by installing additional trim ma-
terial, such as seat covers, on the
seat that is not specifically designed
to assure proper air bag operation.
Additionally, do not stow any ob-
jects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback.
Such objects may interfere with the
proper operation of the occupant
classification sensors.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
.
.
Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you
may severely burn yourself.
WARNING
.
.
Do not place any objects on the
steering wheel pad or on the instru-
ment panel. Also, do not place any
objects between any occupant and
the steering wheel or instrument
panel. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the front air bags inflate.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the supplemental air bag system.
This is to prevent accidental infla-
tion of the supplemental air bag or
damage to the supplemental air bag
system.
.
.
Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end
structure. This could affect proper
operation of the front air bag sys-
tem.
Do not place objects with sharp
edges on the seat. Also, do not
place heavy objects on the seat that
will leave permanent impressions in
the seat. Such objects can damage
the seat or occupant classification
sensors (weight sensors). This can
affect the operation of the air bag
system and result in serious perso-
nal injury.
.
.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the seat belt system. This may
affect the front air bag system.
Tampering with the seat belt system
may result in serious personal in-
jury.
Tampering with the front air bag
system may result in serious perso-
nal injury. Tampering includes
changes to the steering wheel and
the instrument panel assembly by
Work on and around the front air
bag system should be done by a
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-
.
Do not use water or acidic cleaners
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
collisions, although they may inflate if the forces
in another type of collision are similar to those of
a higher severity side impact. They are designed
to inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted. They may not inflate in certain side
collisions on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.
trical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not
be modified or disconnected. Un-
authorized electrical test equipment
and probing devices should not be
used on the air bag system.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.
.
A cracked windshield should be
replaced immediately by a qualified
repair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing
condition should get fresh air promptly.
SSS0978
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM-
PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND
ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IM-
PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYS-
TEMS
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest
and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain
air bags help to cushion the impact force to the
head of occupants in the front and rear outboard
seating positions. They can help save lives and
reduce serious injuries. However, side air bags
and curtain air bags may cause abrasions or
other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags
do not provide restraint to the lower body.
The side air bags are located in the outside of
the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air
bags are located in the side roof rails. These
systems are designed to meet voluntary guide-
lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-
position occupants. However, all of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual still apply and must be followed.
The side air bags and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate in higher severity side
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bags. Rear seat
1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate quickly in order to help protect the
occupants in the outboard seating positions.
Because of this, the force of the side air bags
and curtain air bags inflating can increase the
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, these air bag modules during inflation.
The side air bags and curtain air bags will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.
.
.
Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain air bag system
components will be hot. Do not
touch them; you may severely burn
yourself.
be done by a NISSAN dealer. In-
stallation of electrical equipment
should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or discon-
nected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air
bag and curtain supplemental air
bag systems.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the side air bag and curtain air
bag systems. This is to prevent
damage to or accidental inflation
of the side air bag and curtain air
bag systems.
The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
.
.
Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel.
This could affect proper operation
of the side air bag and curtain air
bag systems.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the systems are operational.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
Tampering with the side air bag
system may result in serious perso-
nal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing
material near the seatbacks or by
installing additional trim material,
such as seat covers, around the side
air bag.
WARNING
.
Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door
finisher and the front seat. Such
objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury if a side
air bag inflates.
.
Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems should
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS
(front seats)
reduce forces against the chest.
and probing devices should not be
used on the pretensioner system.
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner
system, the supplemental air bag warning light
will not come on, will flash intermittently or
will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after
the ignition switch has been placed in the ON
position. In this case, the pretensioner system
may not function properly and must be checked
and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.
.
If you need to dispose of a preten-
sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a
NISSAN dealer. Correct preten-
sioner disposal procedures are set
forth in the appropriate NISSAN
Service Manual. Incorrect disposal
procedures could cause personal
injury.
WARNING
.
.
The pretensioners cannot be reused
after activation. They must be re-
placed together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
If the vehicle becomes involved in a
frontal collision but a pretensioner
is not activated, be sure to have the
pretensioner system checked and, if
necessary, replaced by a NISSAN
dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
The pretensioner system activates in conjunc-
tion with the front air bag system. Working with
the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat
belt when the vehicle becomes involved in
certain types of collisions, helping to restrain
front seat occupants.
.
.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the pretensioner system. This is
to prevent damage to or accidental
activation of the pretensioners.
Tampering with the pretensioner
system may result in serious perso-
nal injury.
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same
way as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. The
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get fresh
air promptly.
Work around and on the preten-
sioner system should be done by a
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-
trical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Un-
authorized electrical test equipment
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
1-56 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.
This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and
pretensioner systems need servicing:
.
.
.
The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
SSS1020
SPA1097
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems
may not operate properly. They must be checked
and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle
as shown in the illustration.
The supplemental air bag warning light, display-
ing
in the instrument panel, monitors the
circuits of the supplemental front-impact air bag,
front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact sup-
plemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner
systems. The monitored circuits include Air bag
Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, satellite
sensors, occupant classification system, front air
bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain air
bag modules, pretensioners and all related
wiring.
1 SRS air bag
*
The warning labels are located on the surface of
the sun visors.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as
soon as possible.
.
Once a front air bag, side air bag or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air
bag module will not function again
and must be replaced. Additionally,
if any of the front air bags inflate,
the activated pretensioners must
also be replaced. The air bag mod-
ule and pretensioner should be
replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The
air bag modules and pretensioner
system cannot be repaired.
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-
CEDURE
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioners are designed to activate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
will remain illuminated after inflation has oc-
curred. Repair and replacement of these sys-
tems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer.
.
.
The front air bag, side air bag and
curtain air bag systems, and preten-
sioner system should be inspected
by a NISSAN dealer if there is any
damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle.
If you need to dispose of a supple-
mental air bag or pretensioner or
scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Correct supplemental air
bag and pretensioner system dis-
posal procedures are set forth in the
appropriate NISSAN Service Man-
ual. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain
air bags and pretensioners and related parts
should be pointed out to the person performing
the maintenance. The ignition switch should
always be in the LOCK position when working
under the hood or inside the vehicle.
1-58 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Instruments and controls
Cockpit............................................................ 2-2
Instrument panel ................................................ 2-3
Meters and gauges............................................. 2-4
Speedometer and odometer ............................. 2-5
Fuel gauge ................................................... 2-7
Vehicle information display................................ 2-7
Outside air temperature (if so equipped).............. 2-7
Headlight and turn signal switch .......................... 2-23
Headlight switch .......................................... 2-23
Turn signal switch ........................................ 2-26
Fog light switch (if so equipped)...................... 2-27
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ........... 2-28
Clock (if so equipped)....................................... 2-28
Adjusting the time ........................................ 2-29
Resetting the time (Type B) ............................ 2-30
Power outlet ................................................... 2-31
Storage ......................................................... 2-31
Cup holders................................................ 2-31
Glove box .................................................. 2-33
Rear pillar pocket......................................... 2-34
Luggage hooks............................................ 2-34
Utility hooks (if so equipped)........................... 2-35
Windows ....................................................... 2-36
Power windows ........................................... 2-36
Interior lights................................................... 2-38
Map lights (if so equipped)............................. 2-38
Map light control switch (if so equipped) ........... 2-39
Ceiling light ................................................ 2-39
Cargo light (if so equipped)................................ 2-40
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator (if so equipped) ...................... 2-8
Trip computer................................................ 2-8
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ....... 2-10
Checking bulbs ........................................... 2-10
Warning lights............................................. 2-10
Indicator lights............................................. 2-15
Audible reminders ........................................ 2-17
Security systems.............................................. 2-17
Vehicle Security System................................. 2-17
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System................. 2-19
Windshield wiper and washer switch .................... 2-20
Rear window wiper and washer switch.................. 2-22
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch..... 2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COCKPIT
10. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)*
— Cruise control switches*
11. Selector lever or Shift lever
— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
— Manual Transmission (MT)
12. Parking brake
*: if so equipped
SSI0563
1. Front cup holders
6. Outside mirror remote control switch
2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch
7. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
8. Tilting steering wheel lever
3. Steering wheel
— Horn
9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)*
— Audio control*
— Driver’s supplemental air bag
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control*
4. Wiper and washer switch
5. Fuse box cover
2-2 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Push-button ignition switch (models with Intelli-
gent Key system)
12. Heater and air conditioner* control
— Rear window and outside mirror* defroster
switch
13. Utility hooks*
14. iPod® connector*/USB connector*
15. Power outlet
16. Glove box
*: if so equipped
SSI0562
1. Side ventilator
6. Front passenger air bag status light
7. Front passenger supplemental air bag
8. Fuel-filler door release handle
9. Hood release handle
2. Meters and gauges
3. Center ventilator
4. Hazard warning flasher switch
5. Audio system*
— Clock*
10. Ignition switch (models without Intelligent Key
system)
Instruments and controls 2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
METERS AND GAUGES
*: if so equipped
The needle indicators may move slightly
after the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF or LOCK position. This is not a
malfunction.
SIC4119
1. Tachometer
5. Speedometer
2. Engine coolant temperature gauge
6. Warning/indicator lights
7. Instrument brightness control knob
3. Vehicle information display
— Odometer/twin trip odometer
— Trip computer
8. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-
tion indicator*
— Outside air temperature*
9. RESET switch for trip odometer/Trip computer
mode switch
4. Fuel gauge
2-4 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For trip computer information, see “TRIP COM-
PUTER” later in this section.
Resetting the trip odometer:
3
Pushing the reset switch
for approximately 1
*
second resets the trip odometer to zero.
SIC4120
SIC4121
Speedometer
Odometer/twin trip odometer
Odometer/twin trip odometer
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
1
2
The odometer
/twin trip odometer
are
*
*
Speedometer
displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour
(km/h).
The odometer records the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
Changing the display:
3
Pushing the reset switch
located on the
*
meter panel changes the display as follows:
TRIP A ? TRIP B ? Trip computer mode ?
TRIP A
Instruments and controls 2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature near the hot (H) end of the
normal range, reduce vehicle speed to
decrease temperature. If gauge is over
the normal range, stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible. If the engine is
overheated, continued operation of the
vehicle may seriously damage the en-
gine. See “IF YOUR VEHICLE OVER-
HEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section for immediate action required.
SIC4122
SIC4123
TACHOMETER
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the
1
*
The gauge
temperature.
indicates the engine coolant
1
engine into the red zone
.
*
The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range when the gauge is within the zone
CAUTION
2
*
shown in the illustration.
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce
engine speed. Operating the engine in
the red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
2-6 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the front passenger’s side of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
.
.
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator light
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon
as possible. After a few driving trips,
the
light should turn off. If the
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by
a NISSAN dealer.
SIC4124
SIC4125
For additional information, see
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
later in this section.
FUEL GAUGE
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
1
*
The gauge
indicates the approximate fuel
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the vehicle information display shows
the following information:
level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
1. Outside air temperature (if so equipped)
2. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-
tion indicator (if so equipped)
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge
registers 0 (empty).
3. Odometer/Instrument brightness control display
4. Twin trip odometer/Trip computer
The low fuel warning light
illuminates when
the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably
before the gauge reaches 0. There will be a
small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge reaches 0.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE (if so
equipped)
The outside air temperature is displayed in 8F or
8C.
Instruments and controls 2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the outside air temperature becomes
378F (38C) or lower, the outside air temperature
display blinks to give a warning. The display will
stop blinking after 1 minute or when the outside
air temperature becomes 398F (48C) or above.
Current fuel consumption
The current fuel consumption mode shows the
current fuel consumption.
Distance to empty (dte — mls or km)
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly
being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in
the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.
The display may differ from the actual outside
temperature displayed on various signs or bill-
boards.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-
MISSION (CVT) POSITION INDICATOR
(if so equipped)
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
The dte mode includes a low range warning
feature. When the fuel level is low, the dte mode
is automatically selected and the dte display will
The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator indicates the selector lever
position when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
SIC4126
A
blink. Push the trip computer mode switch
*
TRIP COMPUTER
to return to the mode that was selected before
the warning occurred.
The switch for the trip computer is located on
the meter panel.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte
display will change to “----”.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, modes of the trip computer can be
selected by pushing the trip computer mode
A
.
If the amount of fuel added is small, the
display just before the ignition switch is
turned off may continue to be displayed.
switch
.
*
A
Each time the trip computer mode switch
is
*
.
When driving uphill or rounding curves, the
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momenta-
rily change the display.
pushed, the display will change as follows:
(TRIP A ? TRIP B) ? Current fuel consumption
? Distance to empty (dte) ? Average fuel
consumption ? Average speed ? Elapsed time
(Canada only) ? Maintenance information
(Canada only) (? TRIP A)
2-8 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
consumption, average speed, elapsed time and
trip odometer (TRIP B only) displays will be reset
at the same time.
returns to the previous mode and the new
interval is set.
Average fuel consumption (mpg or l
(liter)/100 km)
If the interval distance is set to 0, the display will
skip the maintenance information when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The average fuel consumption mode shows the
average fuel consumption since the last reset.
Resetting is done by pushing the trip computer
A
Maintenance information (Canada only)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, maintenance information (the wrench
mode switch
for approximately 1 second.
*
symbol
and distance to change a main-
The display is updated every 30 seconds. At
about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the
display shows “---”.
tenance item) comes on for about 5 seconds
and then turns off.
The wrench symbol
distance comes for changing an item, such as
engine oil.
appears when the set
Average speed (mph or km/h)
The average speed mode shows the average
vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is
done by pushing the trip computer mode switch
To set the distance to change an item:
A
*
for approximately 1 second.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
The display is updated every 30 seconds. The
first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows
“---”.
A
Push the trip computer mode switch
for
*
3 seconds while the wrench symbol
and maintenance information are displayed.
The symbol and distance display will start
flashing and the display shows the current
interval.
Elapsed time (Canada only)
The elapsed time mode shows the time since
the last reset. The displayed time can be reset
A
by pushing the trip computer mode switch
*
A
*
2. Push the switch
distance.
to increase the interval
for approximately 1 second.
Resetting displays
When the average fuel consumption, average
speed, elapsed time or TRIP B is displayed,
push the trip computer mode switch
Each step increases the interval distance by
1,000 km (500 miles). The interval distance
can be set up to 30,000 km (18,000 miles)
after the display returns to 0 (zero).
A
*
for
longer than 3 seconds. The average fuel
3. If no further action is made, the display
Instruments and controls 2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Low fuel warning light
High beam indicator light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Overdrive off indicator light*
Security indicator light
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light
Low tire pressure warning light
Low washer fluid warning light*
P position selecting warning light*
Seat belt warning light
Brake warning light
Charge warning light
Slip indicator light
Door open warning light
Supplemental air bag warning light
Front passenger air bag status light
Cruise indicator light*
Low beam indicator light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Electric power steering warning light
Engine oil pressure warning light
Intelligent Key system warning light*
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
light
Engine start operation indicator light*
*: if so equipped
off (if so equipped):
CHECKING BULBS
WARNING LIGHTS
,
,
or
,
,
,
,
,
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
,
or
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
If any light does not come on, it may indicate a
burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system checked by
a NISSAN dealer.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates
,
or
,
,
,
,
The following lights come on briefly and then go
2-10 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the ABS is operational.
AND CLUTCH FLUID” in the “8. Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section.)
fluid level may increase your stop-
ping distance and braking will re-
quire greater pedal effort as well as
pedal travel.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may
indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
.
If the brake fluid level is below the
minimum or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-
tance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section.)
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator:
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
brake system checked, and if necessary re-
paired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See
“Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”
earlier in this section.)
Charge warning light
or
Brake warning light
If the light illuminates while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not
functioning properly. Turn the engine off and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,
broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a
NISSAN dealer immediately.
This light functions for both the parking brake
and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the light illuminates when the parking brake is
applied.
WARNING
CAUTION
.
Your brake system may not be
working properly if the warning light
is on. Driving could be dangerous. If
you judge it to be safe, drive care-
fully to the nearest service station
for repairs. Otherwise, have your
vehicle towed because driving it
could be dangerous.
Low brake fluid warning light:
Do not continue driving if the alternator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the
light illuminates while the engine is running with
the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle
and perform the following:
Door open warning light
This light illuminates when any of the doors and/
or back door are not closed securely while the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid is
necessary, add fluid and have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See “BRAKE
.
Pressing the brake pedal with the
engine stopped and/or low brake
Instruments and controls 2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Electric power steering warning
light
.
.
The light blinks in green when the Intelligent
Key battery is running out of power. Replace
the battery with a new one. (See “KEY
BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See
“ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.)
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the electric power steering warning light illumi-
nates. After starting the engine, the electric
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates the electric power steering system is
operational.
The light illuminates in yellow when it warns
of a malfunction with the electrical steering
lock system or the Intelligent Key system.
CAUTION
If the electric power steering warning light
illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the electric power steering system is
not functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the electric power steering system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If the warning light illuminates in yellow while the
engine is stopped, it may be impossible to free
the steering lock or to start the engine. If the
light comes on while the engine is running, you
can drive the vehicle. However in these cases,
contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as
possible.
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not cov-
ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as
soon as it is safe to do so.
When the electric power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running, the power
assist to the steering will cease operation but
you will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering efforts are required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp
turns and at low speeds.
Low fuel warning light
Intelligent Key system warning light
(if so equipped)
This light illuminates when the fuel in the tank is
getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,
preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the 0
(empty) position.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds
and then turns off.
See “ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYS-
TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
There will be a small reserve of fuel
remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge
reaches the 0 position.
This light illuminates or blinks as follows:
Engine oil pressure warning light
.
The light blinks in yellow when the door is
closed with the Intelligent Key left outside
the vehicle and the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position. Make sure that the
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or illuminates during normal driving,
2-12 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“5. Starting and driving” section and “TIRE
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”
in the “6. In case of emergency” section.
likelihood of tire failure. Serious
vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low
tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still illuminates while driv-
ing after adjusting the tire pressure,
a tire may be flat. If you have a flat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible.
Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.
For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-
SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
WARNING
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. The low tire pressure warning
light does not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to
the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to
activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
.
.
If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, have the vehicle checked
by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
speed, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Driving with un-
der-inflated tires may permanently
damage the tires and increase the
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-
SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the
Instruments and controls 2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
to the P (Park) position or push the ignition
switch to the ON position.
Supplemental air bag warning light
CAUTION
An inside warning chime will also sound.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning
light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the
supplemental front air bag and supplemental
side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems
and/or pretensioner seat belt are operational.
.
.
The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure
to check the tire pressure regularly.
See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
If the vehicle is being driven at
speeds of less than 16 MPH (25
km/h), the TPMS may not operate
correctly.
Seat belt warning light
The light and chime remind you to fasten seat
belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, and will
remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is
fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound
for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt
is securely fastened.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and
pretensioner systems need servicing and your
vehicle must be taken to your nearest NISSAN
dealer.
.
Be sure to install the specified size
of tires to the four wheels correctly.
Low washer fluid warning light
(Canada only)
.
.
.
The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
The seat belt warning light for the front
passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat is
occupied. For 5 seconds after the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the system does
not activate the warning light for the front
passenger.
This light illuminates when the washer fluid is at
a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. (See
“WINDOW WASHER FLUID” in the “8. Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not illuminate at all.
P position selecting warning light
(if so equipped)
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental
Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioners may
not function properly.
See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint system”
section for precautions on seat belt usage.
The warning light blinks in red when the ignition
switch is pushed to stop the engine with the
selector lever in any position except the P (Park)
position.
For additional information, see “SUPPLEMEN-
TAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety —
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section.
If this warning appears, move the selector lever
2-14 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See “CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
WARNING
If the malfunction indicator light illuminates
steady or blinks while the engine is running, it
may indicate a potential emission control and/or
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) mal-
function.
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as
soon as possible.
Front passenger air bag status
light
The front passenger air bag status light (located
on the center of the instrument panel) will be lit
and the passenger front air bag will be OFF
depending on how the front passenger seat is
being used.
The malfunction indicator light may also illumi-
nate steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check
to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and
closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3
US gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
For front passenger air bag status light opera-
tion, see “NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG
SYSTEM (front seats)” in the “1. Safety —
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section of this manual.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
After a few driving trips, the
light should
Cruise indicator light (if so
equipped)
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
Engine start operation indicator
light (if so equipped)
Cruise main switch indicator:
If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine
is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not
ready for an emission control system inspection/
maintenance test. (See “READINESS FOR
INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST” in
the “9. Technical and consumer information”
section.)
This light illuminates when the cruise control
main switch is pushed. The light turns off when
the main switch is pushed again. When the
cruise indicator light illuminates, the cruise
control system is operational.
This light appears when the selector lever is in
the P (Park) position. This light means that the
engine will start by pushing the ignition switch
with the brake pedal depressed. You can start
the engine directly in any position.
Cruise malfunction:
Operation:
If the cruise indicator light blinks while the
engine is running, it may indicate the cruise
control system is not functioning properly. Have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
High beam indicator light
The malfunction indicator light will illuminate in
one of two ways:
This light illuminates when the headlight high
beam is on and goes out when the low beam is
selected.
.
Malfunction indicator light illuminated steady
Instruments and controls 2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
— An emission control system and/or CVT
malfunction has been detected. Check the
fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
“SECURITY SYSTEMS” later in this section.
Slip indicator light
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
and/or CVT system checked and re-
paired as necessary could lead to poor
driveability, reduced fuel economy, and
possible damage to the emission con-
trol system.
continue to drive the vehicle. The
light
The light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting
the driver that the vehicle is nearing its traction
limits. The road surface may be slippery.
should turn off after a few driving trips. If the
light does not turn off after a few
driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
Low beam indicator light
.
Malfunction indicator light blinking — An
engine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system.
The light illuminates when the headlight switch is
Overdrive off indicator light (if so
equipped)
turned to the
position.
To reduce or avoid emission control system
damage:
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when
the overdrive off mode is selected.
The light flashes when the turn signal switch
lever or hazard switch is turned on.
a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
For additional information, see ““CONTINU-
OUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
c) Avoid steep uphill grades.
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
indicator light
d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
The light illuminates when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This
indicates that the VDC system is not operating.
When the VDC off indicator light and slip
indicator light illuminate with the VDC system
turned on, this light alerts the driver to the fact
that the VDC system’s fail-safe mode is operat-
ing, for example the VDC system may not be
functioning properly. Have the system checked
Security indicator light
The light blinks when the ignition switch is in the
ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This function
indicates the security system equipped on the
vehicle is operational.
The malfunction indicator light may stop
blinking and remain illuminated.
Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN
dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle
towed to the dealer.
If the security system is malfunctioning, this light
will remain on while the ignition switch is in the
ON position. For additional information, see
2-16 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY SYSTEMS
by a NISSAN dealer. If a malfunction occurs in
the system, the VDC system function will be
canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For
additional information, see “VEHICLE DYNAMIC
CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Turn the light switch off when you leave the
vehicle.
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-
ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will
first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,
the sound will always be heard even if the brake
pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the warning
sound is heard.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Key reminder chime
Models with Intelligent Key system:
A chime will sound if the driver side door is
opened while the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC position.
SIC4160
Parking brake reminder chime
Make sure the ignition switch is pushed to the
OFF position, and take the Intelligent Key with
you when leaving the vehicle.
Your vehicle has two types of security systems,
as follows:
The parking brake reminder chime will sound if
the vehicle is driven at more than 4 MPH (7
km/h) with the parking brake applied. Stop the
vehicle and release the parking brake.
.
.
Vehicle security system
Models without Intelligent Key system:
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
The key reminder chime sounds if the driver’s
side door is opened while the key is left in the
ignition switch and the ignition switch is in the
ACC, OFF or LOCK position. Remove the key
and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.
Seat belt warning chime
The security condition will be shown by the
security indicator light.
The seat belt warning chime will sound for about
6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
securely fastened.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors,
or back door when the system is armed. It is not,
however, a motion detection type system that
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
Light reminder chime
The light reminder chime will sound when the
driver side door is opened with the light switch
in the
or
position, and the ignition
switch is in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position.
Instruments and controls 2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior
or exterior vehicle components in all situations.
Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle,
and always lock it when unattended. Be aware
of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit
areas whenever possible.
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors
can be locked with:
.
the LOCK
Intelligent Key (if so equipped)
button on the keyfob or
.
any request switch (Intelligent Key
equipped model)
.
.
the power door lock switch
Many devices offering additional protection,
such as component locks, identification markers,
and tracking systems, are available at auto
supply stores and specialty shops. Your
NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment.
Check with your insurance company to see if
you may be eligible for discounts for various
theft protection features.
the key — master or mechanical (In-
telligent Key equipped model)
4. Confirm that the security indicator light
illuminates. The security indicator light stays
on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle
security system is now pre-armed. After
about 30 seconds the vehicle security
system automatically shifts into the armed
phase. The security light begins to flash
once every approximately 3 seconds. If,
during this 30-second pre-arm time period,
the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position, the
system will not arm.
SIC2045
How to arm the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows.
The system can be armed even if the
windows are open.
2. Models with Intelligent Key system:
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position
and remove the Intelligent Key from the
vehicle.
Even when the driver and/or passengers
are in the vehicle, the system will activate
with all doors locked with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position. When turning
the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, the system will be released.
Models without Intelligent Key system:
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and remove the key.
2-18 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-
TEM
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-
da. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions;
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the follow-
ing alarm:
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
.
The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If the engine fails to start using the registered
key, it may be due to interference caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automated payment device on the key
ring. Restart the engine using the following
procedures:
.
The alarm automatically turns off after
approximately 50 seconds. However, the
alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered
with again.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY
RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
The alarm is activated by:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
.
Unlocking the door without using the keyfob,
the Intelligent Key (if so equipped) the
request switch (if so equipped) or the key.
(Even if the door is opened by releasing the
door inside lock knob, the alarm will
activate.)
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately 10
seconds.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.
How to stop an activated alarm
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by
pushing the UNLOCK
button on the keyfob
or Intelligent Key, pushing the request switch or
using the key. The alarm will not stop if the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON
position.
If this procedure allows the engine to start,
NISSAN recommends placing the regis-
tered key on a separate key ring to avoid
interference from other devices.
If the system does not operate as de-
scribed above, have it checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Statement related to section 15 of FCC
rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System (CONT ASSY-BCM. ANT ASSY-
IMMOBILISER)
Instruments and controls 2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
service as soon as possible. Please bring
all registered keys that you have when
visiting a NISSAN dealer for service.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm windshield with
the defroster before you wash the
windshield.
CAUTION
.
.
.
Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
SIC2045
Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.
Security indicator light
The security indicator light is located on the
meter panel. It indicates the status of the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
window washer reservoir tank.
The light blinks after the ignition switch was in
the LOCK position. This function indicates the
security systems equipped on the vehicle are
operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
.
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer
reservoir tank. Do not use the
window washer reservoir tank to
If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer
for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
2-20 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Pull the lever toward you
to operate the
*
mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
times.
If the windshield wiper operation is inter-
rupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
turn the wiper switch to the OFF position
and remove the snow or ice that is on and
around the wiper arms. In approximately 1
minute, turn the switch on again to operate
the wiper.
SIC3664
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
1
*
Intermittent — intermittent operation can be
A
adjusted by turning the knob toward
*
B
*
(Slower) or
(Faster).
2
*
Low — continuous low speed operation
3
High — continuous high speed operation
*
4
Push the lever up
operation of the wiper.
to have one sweep
*
Instruments and controls 2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
and water.
WARNING
If the rear window wiper operation is
interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that is
on and around the wiper arms. In approxi-
mately 1 minute, turn the switch on again
to operate the wiper.
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the rear window
glass and obscure your vision. Warm
the rear window with the defroster
before you wash the rear window.
CAUTION
.
.
.
Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
SIC3666
Do not operate the washer if the
reservoir tank is empty.
The rear window wiper and washer operate
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
window washer reservoir tank.
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position
to operate the wiper.
1
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
*
(not adjustable)
2
*
Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-
tion
.
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer
reservoir tank. Do not use the
window washer reservoir tank to
mix the washer fluid concentrate
3
*
Push the switch forward
to operate the
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
times.
2-22 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
To defog/defrost the rear window glass and
outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine
1
and push the switch
on. The indicator light
*
2
will illuminate. Push the switch again to turn
*
the defroster off.
It will automatically turn off in approximately 15
minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.
SIC3668
SIC4127
Type A
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Lighting
1
*
Turn the switch to the
position:
The front park, side marker, tail, license
plate and instrument lights will come on.
2
*
Turn the switch to the
position:
Headlights will come on and all the other
lights remain on.
SIC4145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type B
Instruments and controls 2-23
automatically when it is dark and turn off the
headlights when it is light.
For US models: The headlights will also be
turned on automatically at twilight or in rainy
weather (when the windshield wiper is operated
continuously).
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and one of the doors is opened and this
condition is continued, the headlights remain on
for 5 minutes.
Automatic headlights off delay:
You can keep the headlights on for up to 45
seconds after you place the ignition switch in
OFF and open any door then close all the doors.
SIC3669
SAA1232
Be sure not to put anything on top of the
Autolight system (if so equipped)
1
*
photo sensor
located on the top of the
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically.
instrument panel. The photo sensor con-
trols the autolight; if it is covered, the
photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the
headlights will illuminate.
To set the autolight system:
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the
1
*
AUTO position
.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch
to the OFF,
or
position.
The autolight system can turn on the headlights
2-24 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
has been placed in the OFF position.
illumination when driving at night.
.
When the headlight switch remains in the
If the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started, the daytime running lights do not
illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate
once the parking brake is released. The daytime
running lights will remain on until the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position.
or
position after the lights
automatically turn off, the lights will turn on
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
CAUTION
WARNING
.
.
When you turn on the headlight
switch again after the lights auto-
matically turn off, the lights will not
turn off automatically. Be sure to
turn the light switch to the OFF
position when you leave the vehicle
for extended periods of time, other-
wise the battery will be discharged.
When the daytime running light system
is active, tail lights on your vehicle are
not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on
your headlights. Failure to do so could
cause an accident injuring yourself and
others.
SIC3670
Headlight beam select
1
*
To select the low beam, put the lever in the
neutral position as shown.
Never leave the light switch on
when the engine is not running for
extended periods of time even if the
headlights turn off automatically.
2
*
To select the high beam, push the lever
forward while the switch is in the
position. Pull it back to select the low beam.
3
*
Pulling the lever toward you will flash the
headlight high beam even when the head-
light switch is in the OFF position.
Daytime running light system (Canada
only)
The daytime running lights automatically illumi-
nate when the engine is started with the parking
brake released. The daytime running lights
operate with the headlight switch in the OFF
Battery saver system
.
When the headlight switch is in the
or
position while the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the lights will automatically
turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch
position or in the
position. Turn the
position for full
headlight switch to the
Instruments and controls 2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument brightness control
The instrument brightness control operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
A
Push the control knob
to adjust the bright-
*
ness of the instrument panel lights. The bright-
B
ness indicator
will be shown briefly in the
*
vehicle information display when the control is
turned.
When the brightness level reaches the maximum
or minimum, a beep will sound.
SIC3671
SIC4128
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
1 Turn signal
*
Move the lever up or down to signal the turning
direction. When the turn is completed, the turn
signals cancel automatically.
2 Lane change signal
*
To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where lights begin flashing.
SIC4129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26 Instruments and controls
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
.
Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are
on.
The flasher can be actuated with the ignition
switch in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
SIC3672
SIC2574
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights will flash.
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
switch to the
to the
position, then turn the switch
position. To turn them off, turn the
WARNING
switch to the OFF position.
.
.
If stopping for an emergency, be
sure to move the vehicle well off the
road.
The headlights must be on for the fog lights to
operate.
Do not use the hazard warning
flashers while moving on the high-
way unless unusual circumstances
force you to drive so slowly that
your vehicle might become a hazard
to other traffic.
Instruments and controls 2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
HORN
CLOCK (if so equipped)
The digital clock (in the audio unit) displays time
when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
The clock ON or OFF mode can be selected.
If the power supply is disconnected, the
clock will not indicate the correct time.
Readjust the time.
SIC4130
SIC1881
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel.
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most
driving conditions.
WARNING
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.
If maximum engine power is needed to free a
stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The
indicator will illuminate.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. (See “VEHICLE
DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.)
2-28 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The display will return to the regular clock
display after 5 seconds.
SIC4131
SIC4146
Type A
Type B
Type B
ADJUSTING THE TIME
1
Push the MENU button
until the CLOCK
*
Type A
2
mode appears. Then push the TUNE
button to select “CLK-ON” or “CLK-
OFF” to turn the clock on or off.
or
*
1
Push the CLOCK button
*
to turn the clock on
3
SEEK
*
or off.
1
*
1. Push and hold the CLOCK button
the clock display starts to flash.
until
“CLK-ON” needs to be selected before adjust-
ing the clock display.
2
2. Push the SEEK/TRACK button
*
to adjust
1
1. Push the MENU button
.
*
the hours.
1
*
2. Push the MENU button
display starts to flash.
again. The clock
3
3. Push the TUNE/FF·REW button
adjust the minutes.
to
*
2
*
3
*
3. Push the TUNE
or SEEK
button to
1
*
4. Push the CLOCK button
the clock set mode.
again to exit
adjust the hours.
Instruments and controls 2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
1
4. Push the MENU button
again. The
5. Push the ENTER SETTING button
.
*
*
display will switch to the minute adjustment
mode.
The display will return to the regular clock
display after 5 seconds.
5. Push the TUNE or SEEK button to adjust the
minutes.
RESETTING THE TIME (Type B)
By holding down the MENU button and then
pushing the TUNE or SEEK button, the time will
be reset as follows.
6. Push the MENU button again to exit the
clock mode.
The display will return to the regular clock
display after 5 seconds.
.
In case the displayed minute is in the range
of 00 - 29, the hour will stay the same and
the minute will be reset to 00.
.
In case the displayed minute is in the range
of 30 - 59, the hour will be advanced by one
hour and the minute will be reset to 00.
SIC4275
Type C
Type C
For example, if the MENU and TUNE buttons are
pushed while the time is between “8:00” and
“8:29”, the display will be reset to “8:00”. If
pushed while the time is between “8:30” and
“8:59”, the display will be reset to “9:00”. At the
same time the display will return to the previous
audio mode.
1
Push the ENTER SETTING button
“Setting Clock” and “On-screen Clock” appear
on the display. Then turn the TUNE/SCROLL
until
*
2
*
knob
to turn the clock on or off.
1
*
1. Push the ENTER SETTING button
until
“Setting Clock” and “Clock Adjust” appear
on the display.
2
*
2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob
the hour.
to adjust
1
.
*
3. Push the ENTER SETTING button
2
4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob
*
to adjust
the minute.
2-30 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER OUTLET
STORAGE
CUP HOLDERS
.
Avoid using power outlet when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear
window defroster is on.
CAUTION
.
.
This power outlet is not designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit.
.
.
Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used
to prevent spilling the drink. If the
liquid is hot, it can scald you or your
passenger.
Push the plug in as far as it will go.
If good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal tem-
perature fuse may open.
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
.
.
Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical acces-
sory being used is turned OFF.
SIC4132
When not in use, be sure to close
the cap. Do not allow water to
contact the outlet.
The power outlet is located in the instrument
panel.
CAUTION
.
.
The outlet and plug may be hot
during or immediately after use.
Do not use with accessories that
exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power
draw. Do not use double adapters or
more than one electrical accessory.
.
Use power outlet with the engine
running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Instruments and controls 2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIC4133
SIC4134
SIC4135
Driver’s side instrument panel
Center console
Rear (if so equipped)
Front
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.
2-32 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Soft bottle holders
CAUTION
.
.
Do not use bottle holder for any
other objects that could be thrown
about in the vehicle and possibly
injure people during sudden braking
or an accident.
Do not use bottle holder for open
liquid containers.
SIC4138
SIC4137
Door (front and rear)
GLOVE BOX
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
To open the glove box, pull the handle.
To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.
SIC4136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear of center console
Instruments and controls 2-33
SIC4165
SIC4147
SIC4141
REAR PILLAR POCKET
LUGGAGE HOOKS
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
Do not store objects on the horizontal
surface just above the glove box or on
top of the instrument panel. Objects
can become projectiles and/or interfere
with passenger air bag deployment
causing serious personal injury.
Do not keep heavy or long objects in
the pocket.
.
Do not attach upper tether anchors
to the luggage hooks. The child
restraint will not be properly in-
stalled. Your child could be injured
or killed in a sudden stop or colli-
sion.
.
.
Always make sure that the luggage
is properly secured. Use the suitable
ropes and hooks.
Unsecured luggage can become
2-34 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
dangerous in an accident or sudden
stop.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 7
A
B
lb (3 kg) * or 22 lb (10 kg) * to a
single hook.
SIC4142
SIC4143
Instrument panel
Rear door
The utility hooks can be attached to the holes as
illustrated.
UTILITY HOOKS (if so equipped)
Two removable utility hooks are supplied with
your vehicle. The utility hooks can be attached to
or removed from the holes on the instrument
panel and the rear doors.
WARNING
CHOKING HAZARD-Small parts. Not for
children under 3 years. Do not allow
children to play with utility hook.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 3
lb (1.5 kg) to a single hook.
To remove the hook from the hole, pull it straight
up. Do not twist or turn the hooks for
installation or removal.
Instruments and controls 2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDOWS
Push it in again to cancel.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
.
.
Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before
closing the windows. Use the win-
dow lock switch to prevent unex-
pected use of the power windows.
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols and become trapped in the
window. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.
SIC3507
Main power window switch (driver’s
side)
1. Window lock button
2. Driver side window
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON position, or for about 45
seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position. If the driver’s or front passenger’s
door is opened during this period of about 45
seconds, power to the windows is canceled.
3. Rear left passenger side window
4. Front passenger side window
5. Rear right passenger side window
A
*
To open or close the window, push down
or
B
pull up
the switch and hold it. The main
*
switch (driver side switches) will open or close
all the windows.
Locking passengers’ windows
C
When the lock button
is pushed in, only the
*
driver side window can be opened or closed.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto-reverse function
WARNING
There are some small distances imme-
diately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., in-
side the vehicle before closing the
window.
If the control unit detects something caught in
the window as it is closing, the window will be
immediately lowered.
SIC3508
SIC3509
The auto reverse function can be activated when
the window is closed by automatic operation
when the ignition switch is in the ON position or
for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed
in the OFF position.
Passenger side power window switch
Automatic operation
The automatic operation is available for the
switch that has an mark on its surface.
The passenger side switch will open or close
only the corresponding window. To open or
close the window, push down or pull up the
switch and hold it.
To fully open or close the window, completely
push down or pull up the switch and release it;
the switch need not be held. The window will
automatically open or close all the way. To stop
the window, just push or lift the switch in the
opposite direction.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window
occurs.
A light push or pull on the switch will cause the
window to open or close until the switch is
released.
If the windows do not close automatically
If the power window automatic function (closing
only) does not operate properly, perform the
following procedure to initialize the power
window system.
Instruments and controls 2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Close the door.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could
result in a discharged battery.
3. Open the window completely by operating
the power window switch.
4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to
close the window, and then hold the switch
more than 3 seconds after the window is
closed completely.
5. Release the power window switch. Operate
the window by the automatic function to
confirm the initialization is complete.
If the power window automatic function does
not operate properly after performing the pro-
cedure above, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
SIC4166
MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)
Operate the map light switch to turn the map
light on or off.
1
*
: ON position
2
*
: OFF position
2-38 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the map lights will illuminate under the following
conditions:
.
.
.
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
(models with Intelligent Key system)
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
the key is removed from the ignition switch
(models without Intelligent Key system)
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-
LOCK
button (on the keyfob or
Intelligent Key) or the request switch (In-
telligent Key system equipped model), with
the ignition switch in the LOCK position
SIC4167
SIC4148
MAP LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH (if so
equipped)
CEILING LIGHT
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
The ceiling light switch has three positions: ON
.
.
any door is opened and then closed with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position
1
*
2
*
3
*
, center
and OFF
.
The map lights control switch has three posi-
1
*
2
*
3
*
tions: ON
, OFF
and center
.
ON position
When the switch is in the ON position
ceiling light will illuminate.
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
ON position
1
, the
*
any door is opened with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position
1
*
When the switch is in the ON position
map lights will illuminate.
, the
Center position
When the switch is in the center
— remain on while the door is opened.
When the door is closed, the lights go off.
OFF position
position
2
, the ceiling light will illuminate under the
2
When the switch is in the OFF position
, the
*
*
following conditions:
map lights will not illuminate, regardless of the
condition.
The lights will turn off after 30 minutes
when the lights remain illuminated to
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
.
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
(models with Intelligent Key system)
Center position
3
When the switch is in the center position
,
*
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
Instruments and controls 2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CARGO LIGHT (if so equipped)
.
.
the key is removed from the ignition switch
(models without Intelligent Key system)
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-
LOCK
button (on the keyfob or
Intelligent Key) or the request switch (In-
telligent Key system equipped model), with
the ignition switch in the LOCK position
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
.
.
any door is opened and then closed with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
SIC4144
any door is opened with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position
1
*
When the switch is in the ON position
, the
light illuminates while the back door is opened.
When the back door is closed, the light will turn
off.
— remain on while the door is opened.
When the door is closed, the lights go off.
2
*
When the switch is in the OFF position
light will turn off.
, the
The light will turn off after 30 minutes
when the lights remain illuminated to
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
OFF position
3
When the switch is in the OFF position
, the
*
ceiling light will not illuminate, regardless of the
condition.
2-40 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys ............................................................... 3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys ............ 3-2
Intelligent Keys (if so equipped)......................... 3-3
Doors.............................................................. 3-4
Locking with power door lock switch .................. 3-5
Automatic door locks ...................................... 3-5
Child safety rear door lock ............................... 3-6
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped)........... 3-6
How to use remote keyless entry system ............. 3-7
Intelligent Key system (if so equipped) .................. 3-10
Intelligent Key operating range ........................ 3-12
Door locks/unlocks precaution ........................ 3-12
Intelligent Key operation................................. 3-13
Battery saver system..................................... 3-14
Warning lights and audible reminders ............... 3-14
Troubleshooting guide ................................... 3-15
How to use remote keyless entry function .......... 3-17
Hood ............................................................ 3-21
¯
Bumpers and side sill extensions (Krom models) ..... 3-23
Fuel-filler door ................................................. 3-24
Opening the fuel-filler door............................. 3-24
Fuel-filler cap .............................................. 3-24
Tilt steering column .......................................... 3-25
Tilt operation............................................... 3-26
Sun visors ...................................................... 3-26
Mirrors........................................................... 3-26
Inside mirror................................................ 3-26
Outside mirrors............................................ 3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEYS
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe
place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If
you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN
does not record any key numbers so it is very
important to keep track of your key number plate.
duplicate your existing key. As many as 5 keys
can be used with one vehicle. You should bring
all the registered keys that you have to a
NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because
the registration process will erase the memory of
all key codes previously registered into the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the
registration process, these components will only
recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System during registration. Any key
that is not given to your dealer at the time of
registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, this key can be
duplicated by a NISSAN dealer.
SPA2405
CAUTION
1. Master key (2 sets)
2. Key number plate
Do not allow the NISSAN Vehicle Im-
mobilizer System key, which contains
an electrical transponder, to come in
contact with salt water. This could
cause the system to malfunction.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-
TEM KEYS
Your vehicle can only be driven with the master
keys which are registered to the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in
the key head.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
nents when registering new keys, be sure to take
all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer.
computer or cellular phone.
— Do not allow the Intelligent Key
to come into contact with water
or salt water, and do not wash it
CAUTION
in
a
washing machine. This
could affect the system function.
.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when driving. The Intelli-
gent Key is a precision device with a
built-in transmitter. To avoid dama-
ging it, please note the following.
.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID
code of that Intelligent Key. This will
prevent the Intelligent Key from
unauthorized use to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding
the erasing procedure, please con-
tact a NISSAN dealer.
— The Intelligent Key is water
resistant; however, wetting may
damage the Intelligent Key. If
the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is com-
pletely dry.
SPA2406
1. Intelligent Key (2 sets)
2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2 sets)
3. Key number plate
— Do not bend, drop or strike it
against another object.
INTELLIGENT KEYS (if so equipped)
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to your
vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-
nents. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The new
keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer
prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your
vehicle. Since the registration process requires
erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-
— Do not place the Intelligent Key
for an extended period in a
place where temperatures ex-
ceed 1408F (608C).
— Do not change or modify the
Intelligent Key.
— Do not use a magnet key holder.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key
near an electric appliance such
as a television set, personal
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOORS
WARNING
.
Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping
to prevent persons from being
thrown from the vehicle. This also
helps keep children and others from
unintentionally opening the doors,
and will help keep out intruders.
.
.
Before opening any door, always
look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
SPA2033
SPA2602
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.
Mechanical key
LOCKING WITH KEY
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.
The power door lock system allows you to lock
or unlock all doors simultaneously.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.
.
Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the
1
front of the vehicle
the back door.
will lock all doors and
*
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors. (See “DOORS” later in this section.)
.
Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once
2
*
to the rear of the vehicle
will unlock the
driver’s door. After returning the key to the
neutral position, turning it to the rear again
within 5 seconds will unlock all doors and
the back door.
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key in-
stalled in the Intelligent Key.
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout protection
Lockout protection function helps to prevent the
keys from being accidentally locked inside the
vehicle.
For models with Intelligent Key system:
.
When the power door lock switch (driver’s
or front passenger’s) is moved to the lock
position with the ignition switch placed in
the ACC or ON position and any door open,
all doors will lock and then unlock auto-
matically.
.
When the power door lock switch is moved
to the lock position with the Intelligent Key
left in the vehicle and any door open, all
doors will unlock automatically and a chime
will sound after the door is closed.
SPA2603
SPA2300
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCH
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
1
lock knob to the lock position
door.
then close the
Operating the power door lock switch will lock
or unlock all the doors. The switches are located
on the driver’s and front passenger’s door
armrests.
*
For models without Intelligent Key system:
When the power door lock switch is moved to
the lock position with the key in the ignition
switch and any door open, all doors will lock and
then unlock automatically.
To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the
2
unlock position
.
*
To lock the doors, push the power door lock
When locking the door without a key, be
sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
1
switch to the lock position
with the driver’s
*
or front passenger’s door open, then close the
door.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
.
All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
When locking the door this way, be sure
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
.
All doors unlock automatically when the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
(models with Intelligent Key system).
To unlock the doors, push the power door lock
2
*
switch to the unlock position
.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors (including
the back door), and activate the panic alarm by
using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.
Before locking the doors, make sure the
key is not left in the vehicle.
The keyfob can operate at a distance of
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
(The effective distance depends upon the
conditions around the vehicle.)
.
All doors unlock automatically when the key
is removed from the ignition switch (models
without Intelligent Key system).
The automatic unlock function can be
deactivated or activated.
To deactivate or activate the automatic door
unlock system, perform the following procedure.
1. Close all doors.
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the pur-
chase and use of additional keyfobs, contact a
NISSAN dealer.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Within 20 seconds of performing step 2.
The keyfob will not function:
.
Push and hold the power door lock
switch to the (UNLOCK) position
for more than 5 seconds.
SPA2604
.
When the keyfob is not within the opera-
tional range.
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
4. When activated, the hazard warning lights
will flash twice. When deactivated, the
hazard warning lights will flash once.
Child safety rear door locks help prevent the rear
doors from being opened accidentally, espe-
cially when small children are in the vehicle.
.
When the doors are open or not closed
securely.
.
.
When the key is in the ignition switch.
When the battery is discharged.
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change.
When the levers are in the lock position
1
, the rear doors can be opened only
*
from the outside.
WARNING
When the automatic door unlock system is
deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. To unlock
the door manually, use the inside lock knob or
the power door lock switch (driver’s or front
passenger’s side).
To disengage, move the levers to the unlock
2
position
.
*
The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-
mits radio waves when the buttons are
pushed. The FAA advises that the radio
waves may affect aircraft navigation
and communication systems. Do not
operate the keyfob while on an air-
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
battery, see “KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT”
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
plane. Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the unit
is stored during a flight.
CAUTION
The following conditions or occur-
rences will damage the keyfob.
.
Do not allow the keyfob to become
wet.
.
.
Do not drop the keyfob.
Do not strike the keyfob sharply
against another object.
SPA2416
1
LOCK button
UNLOCK button
PANIC button
*
.
Do not place the keyfob for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).
2
*
3
*
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob
from unauthorized use to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding the
erasing procedure, please contact a
NISSAN dealer.
Locking doors
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Close all the doors.
1
*
3. Push the LOCK
keyfob.
button
on the
If the indicator light on the keyfob does not
illuminate when pushing the buttons, the keyfob
battery may be discharged.
4. All the doors will lock.
All of the doors will lock when the LOCK
button is pushed even though a door
For information regarding the replacement of a
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
remains open.
position.
In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK
button is pushed, the hazard indicator
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
horn chirps once.
Using panic alarm
flashes twice. When the UNLOCK
button
is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the
horn operates.
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the alarm to call attention as
follows:
.
When the LOCK
button is pushed with
all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes
twice and the horn chirps once as a
reminder that the doors are already locked.
3
*
1. Push the PANIC
button
on the
keyfob for more than 1 second.
.
Operate the door handles to confirm that the
doors have been securely locked.
2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will
stay on for 25 seconds.
Unlocking doors
3. The panic alarm stops when:
2
1. Push the UNLOCK
keyfob.
button
on the
*
.
.
It has run for 25 seconds, or
Any of the buttons on the keyfob is
pushed. (Note: the PANIC button must
be pushed for more than 1 second.)
.
.
The driver’s door unlocks.
The hazard indicator flashes once if all
doors are completely closed.
Setting hazard indicator and horn mode
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn
mode when you first receive the vehicle.
2. Push the UNLOCK
5 seconds.
button again within
.
.
All the doors and the back door unlock.
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the
1
LOCK
button
is pushed, the hazard
*
The hazard indicator flashes once if all
doors are completely closed.
indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.
2
*
When the UNLOCK
the hazard indicator flashes once.
button
is pushed,
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
If the horn chirp is not necessary, you can switch
to hazard indicator only mode by following the
switching procedure.
minute of pushing the UNLOCK
button.
Opening any door (including the back door).
Placing the ignition switch in the ON
.
.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode (Pushing the
or
button)
Switching procedure:
DOOR LOCK
HAZARD - twice
HORN - once
DOOR UNLOCK
HAZARD - once
To switch the hazard indicator and horn opera-
tion, push the LOCK
Hazard indicator and horn mode
Hazard indicator mode
HORN - none
1
*
and UNLOCK
2
buttons on the keyfob simultaneously
HAZARD - twice
HAZARD - none
*
for more than 2 seconds.
.
When the hazard indicator mode is set, the
hazard indicator flashes 3 times.
.
When the hazard indicator and horn mode is
set, the hazard indicator flashes once and
the horn chirps once.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
computer.
CAUTION
WARNING
.
When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
.
.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when operating the vehi-
cle.
.
.
Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should con-
tact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
Never leave the Intelligent Key in
the vehicle when you leave the
vehicle.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one.
The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are
pushed. The FAA advises that the
radio waves may affect aircraft na-
vigation and communication sys-
t e m s . D o n o t o p e r a t e t h e
Intelligent Key while on an airplane.
Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored during a flight.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The
Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio
waves. Environmental conditions may interfere
with the operation of the Intelligent Key system
under the following operating conditions.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv-
ing radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as
signals from a TV and personal computer, the
battery life may become shorter.
.
When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such
as a TV tower, power station and broad-
casting station.
For information regarding replacement of a
battery, see “KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT”
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door locks using the remote controller function
or pushing the request switch on the vehicle
without taking the key out from a pocket or
purse. The operating environment and/or condi-
tions may affect the Intelligent Key system
operation.
.
When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular phone, transceiver, and
CB radio.
Because the steering wheel is locked electri-
cally, unlocking the steering wheel with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position is impos-
sible when the vehicle battery is completely
discharged. Always be careful that the vehicle
battery is not completely discharged.
.
.
.
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
cellular phone.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent
the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to
operate the vehicle. For information regarding
the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN deal-
er.
CAUTION
.
Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical compo-
nents, to come into contact with
water or salt water. This could affect
the system function.
The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. For
information about disabling the Intelligent Key
function, contact a NISSAN dealer.
.
.
Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
.
.
Do not change or modify the Intel-
ligent Key.
Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is comple-
tely dry.
.
.
.
Do not place the Intelligent Key for
an extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).
Do not attach the Intelligent Key
with a key holder that contains a
magnet.
Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a mag-
netic field, such as a TV, audio
equipment, personal computers or
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPA2407
SPA2612
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-
TION
switches may not function.
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING
RANGE
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone who does not
carry the Intelligent Key to push the request
switch to lock/unlock the doors including the
back door.
.
Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the In-
telligent Key is outside the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range from the request switch
1
*
.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
.
.
After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
key with you and then lock the doors.
1
*
from each request switch
.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
SPA2408
SPA2606
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the key out from your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch (driver’s or front passen-
A
B
*
ger’s)
or back door request switch
*
within the range of operation.
When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard
indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside
chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details,
see “Setting hazard indicator and horn mode”
later in this section.
SPA2605
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE
REMINDERS
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-
side chime sounds once. The corresponding
door or the back door will unlock.
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position
and carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the
Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or
to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen,
chime or beep sounds inside and outside the
vehicle and a warning light illuminates or blinks.
3. Push the request switch again within 1
minute.
2. Close all the doors.*2
3. Push the door handle request switch (dri-
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-
side chime sounds once again. All the doors
and the back door will unlock.
A
ver’s or front passenger’s)
or the back
*
B
door request switch
*
while carrying the
Intelligent Key with you.*3
When a chime or beep sounds or the warning
light illuminates or blinks, be sure to check the
vehicle and Intelligent Key.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the request switch while
the doors are locked.
4. All the doors and the back door will lock.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
outside chime sounds twice.
See “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” later in
this section and “WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section.
.
.
Opening any door.
*1: Doors will lock with the request switch while
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Pushing the ignition switch.
Intelligent Key system warning light:
P position selecting warning light:
During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK
button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all
doors will be locked automatically after another
1 minute.
*2: Doors will not lock with the request switch
while any door is open.
*3: Doors will not lock with the request switch
when the Intelligent Key is left inside the
vehicle. However, when an Intelligent Key is
inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with
another registered Intelligent Key.
BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
When all the following conditions are met for 60
minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the
power supply to prevent battery discharge.
Unlocking doors
.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position,
and
A
1. Push the door handle request switch
or
*
B
the back door request switch
*
while
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
.
.
All doors are closed, and
The selector lever is in the P (Park) position.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom
Possible cause
Action to take
The P position selecting warning light in the
meter illuminates and the inside warning chime
sounds continuously.
When pushing the ignition switch
to stop the engine
The selector lever is not in the P (Park) Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)
position. position.
When shifting the selector lever
to the P (Park) position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.
position.
tion.
When opening the driver’s door
to get out of the vehicle
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
tion.
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the
meter blinks in yellow, and the outside chime The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime position.
sounds for a few seconds.
tion.
When closing the door after get-
ting out of the vehicle
The P position selecting warning light in the
meter illuminates and the outside chime
sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position and the selector lever is not in position and push the ignition switch to the
the P (Park) position.
OFF position.
When closing the door with the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds
inside lock knob turned to LOCK and all the doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When pushing the request switch
or the LOCK
button on the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.
Intelligent Key to lock the door
A door is not closed securely.
Close the door securely.
Replace the battery with a new one. (See
“KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the
meter blinks in green.
The battery charge is low.
When pushing the ignition switch
to start the engine
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the
meter blinks in yellow and the inside warning The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
chime sounds for a few seconds.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom
Possible cause
Action to take
It warns of a malfunction with the
electrical steering lock system or the
Intelligent Key system.
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the
meter illuminates in yellow.
When pushing the ignition switch
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function will not
operate:
.
.
Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
.
.
.
When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
WARNING
.
.
Do not change or modify the Intel-
ligent Key.
When the doors are open or not closed
securely.
.
.
Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should con-
tact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is comple-
tely dry.
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.
The remote keyless entry function can also
operate the vehicle alarm.
.
.
.
Do not place the Intelligent Key for
an extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).
The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are
pushed. The FAA advises that the
radio waves may affect aircraft na-
vigation and communication sys-
t e m s . D o n o t o p e r a t e t h e
Intelligent Key while on an airplane.
Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored during a flight.
Do not attach the Intelligent Key
with a key holder that contains a
magnet.
Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a mag-
netic field, such as a TV, audio
equipment, personal computers or
cellular phone.
The remote keyless entry function can operate
all door locks using the remote keyless entry
function of the Intelligent Key. The remote
keyless entry function can operate at a distance
of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
(The operating distance depends upon the
conditions around the vehicle.)
CAUTION
.
Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical compo-
nents, to come into contact with
water or salt water. This could affect
the system function.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intelligent Key.
.
Pushing the ignition switch.
5. All the doors and the back door will lock.
During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK
button is pushed, all doors will be locked
automatically after another 1 minute.
6. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
horn chirps once.
Using panic alarm
*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the alarm to call attention as
follows:
*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key
while any door is open.
3
*
1. Push the PANIC
button
on the
Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.
Operate the door handles to confirm that the
doors have been securely locked.
2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will
stay on for 25 seconds.
SPA2252
Unlocking doors
3. The panic alarm stops when:
1
LOCK
button
button
button
*
2
1. Push the UNLOCK
Intelligent Key once.
button
on the
*
2
UNLOCK
PANIC
*
.
.
It has run for 25 seconds, or
3
*
2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The
driver’s door will unlock.
Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key
is pushed. (Note: the PANIC button
When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard
indicator will flash and the horn will sound as a
confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard
indicator and horn mode” later in this section.
must be pushed for more than
second.)
1
3. Push the UNLOCK
1 minute.
button again within
Setting hazard indicator and horn mode
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn
mode when you first receive the vehicle.
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position
and carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1
4. The hazard indicator flashes once. All the
doors and the back door will unlock.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the
2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
1
LOCK
button
is pushed, the hazard
*
minute after pushing the UNLOCK
while the doors are locked.
button
indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.
3. Close all the doors.*2
2
*
When the UNLOCK
the hazard indicator flashes once.
button
is pushed,
1
*
4. Push the LOCK
button
on the
.
Opening any door (including the back door).
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If horns are not necessary, the system can be
switched to the hazard indicator mode.
Hazard indicator and horn mode:
Operation
DOOR LOCK
HAZARD - twice
DOOR UNLOCK
HAZARD - once
In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes
Pushing door handle request switch
or back door request switch
OUTSIDE CHIME - twice
OUTSIDE CHIME - once
twice. When the UNLOCK
button is
pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the
horn operates.
HAZARD - twice
HORN - once
HAZARD - once
HORN - none
Pushing
or
button
Hazard indicator mode:
Operation
DOOR LOCK
DOOR UNLOCK
Pushing door handle request switch
or back door request switch
HAZARD - none
OUTSIDE CHIME - none
HAZARD - twice
OUTSIDE CHIME - none
HAZARD - none
HORN - none
HAZARD - twice
HORN - none
Pushing
or
button
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Switching procedure:
To switch the hazard indicator and horn (chime)
1
operation, push the LOCK
and UN-
*
2
LOCK
buttons on the Intelligent Key
simultaneously for more than 2 seconds.
*
.
When the hazard indicator mode is set, the
hazard indicator flashes 3 times.
.
When the hazard indicator and horn mode is
set, the hazard indicator flashes once and
the horn chirps once.
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOOD
WARNING
.
.
Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the
hood to fly open and result in an
accident.
If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.
SPA2607
When opening the hood:
be hot immediately after the engine has
been stopped.
1
1. Pull the hood release handle
located
*
below the instrument panel; the hood will
then spring up slightly.
When closing the hood:
1. Return the support rod to its original
position.
2
2. Locate the lever
in between the hood
*
and grille, and push the lever sideways with
your fingertips.
2. Slowly move the hood down to latch the
lock.
3
3. Raise the hood
.
*
3. Push the hood down to lock the hood
securely into place.
4
4. Remove the support rod
from the hood
*
5
*
and insert it into the slot
.
A
Hold the coated part
*
when removing or
resetting the support rod. Avoid direct
contact with the metal parts, as they may
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BACK DOOR
WARNING
.
.
Always be sure the back door has
been closed securely to prevent it
from opening while driving.
Do not drive with the back door
open. This could allow dangerous
exhaust gases to be drawn into the
vehicle. See “EXHAUST GAS (car-
bon monoxide)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
.
Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle
before closing the back door.
SPA2608
SPA2609
To open the back door, unlock it and pull the
handle.
CAUTION
The back door can be unlocked by:
Do not step or place heavy objects on
the back door opening (over the rear
combination lights). Doing so could
cause damage to the rear combination
lights and/or personal injury.
—
pushing the UNLOCK
button on the
keyfob or the Intelligent Key (if so equipped)
twice.
—
—
—
pushing the back door request switch (if so
equipped).
pushing the power door lock switch to the
unlock position.
inserting the key into the driver’s door key
cylinder and turning it to the rear of the
vehicle twice.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BUMPERS AND SIDE SILL
¯
EXTENSIONS (Krom models)
¯
The Krom models have unique front and rear
bumpers and side sill extensions. These parts
are close to the ground and may be damaged if
they contact objects such as curbs, parking
blocks, etc.
CAUTION
Reduce vehicle speed to decrease the
possibility of damaging these parts
when:
.
.
driving on bumpy or rutted roads
entering or exiting parking garages
and driveways
SPA2624
.
driving over speed bumps.
CAUTION
The approach and departure angles are
small. Reduce vehicle speed when the
vehicle approaches or leaves a steep
hill. Otherwise, the front and rear bum-
pers may contact the road surface and
be damaged.
SPA2623
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
mishandled. Always stop engine
and do not smoke or allow open
flames or sparks near the vehicle
when refueling.
.
.
Do not attempt to top off the fuel
tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically. Continued
refueling may cause fuel overflow,
resulting in fuel spray and possibly
a fire.
Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It
has a built-in safety valve needed
for proper operation of the fuel
system and emission control sys-
tem. An incorrect cap can result in a
serious malfunction and possible
injury. It could also cause the mal-
function indicator light to come on.
SPA2610
SPA2336
FUEL-FILLER CAP
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the
To open the fuel-filler door, pull the release
handle located below the instrument panel. To
lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.
1
cap counterclockwise
turn the cap clockwise
are heard.
to remove. To tighten,
until ratcheting clicks
*
2
*
.
.
Never pour fuel into the throttle
body to attempt to start your vehi-
cle.
A
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
while refueling.
*
Do not fill a portable fuel container
in the vehicle or trailer. Static elec-
tricity can cause an explosion of
flammable liquid, vapor or gas in
any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death when
WARNING
.
Gasoline is extremely flammable
and highly explosive under certain
conditions. You could be burned or
seriously injured if it is misused or
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
filling portable fuel containers:
off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN deal-
er.
WARNING
— Always place the container on
the ground when filling.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
— Do not use electronic devices
when filling.
For additional information, see
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
— Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
— Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
.
.
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid
paint damage.
Insert the cap straight into the fuel-
filler tube, then tighten until the
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tight-
en the fuel-filler cap properly may
cause the
malfunction indicator
light (MIL) to illuminate. If the
light illuminates because the fuel-
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to
drive the vehicle. The
should turn off after a few driving
trips. If the light does not turn
light
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUN VISORS
MIRRORS
SPA2611
SPA2447
TILT OPERATION
INSIDE MIRROR
1
Push the lock lever down
steering wheel up or down
position.
and adjust the
to the desired
Adjust the angle of the inside mirror to the
desired position.
*
2
*
3
Pull the lock lever up
*
securely to lock the
steering wheel in place.
SIC2872
1. To block out glare from the front, swing
1
*
down the sun visor
.
2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun
visor from the center mount and swing it to
2
*
the side
.
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The outside mirror will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
1
2
Move the switch right
or left
to select
*
*
3
the right or left side mirror, then adjust
the control switch.
using
*
Defrosting outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear
window defroster switch is operated. (See
“REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR
DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section.)
SPA2143
SPA2214
Manual anti-glare type
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
1
The night position
will reduce glare from the
*
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
WARNING
2
Use the day position
hours.
when driving in daylight
*
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
WARNING
Use the night position only when ne-
cessary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.
Adjusting outside mirrors
The outside mirror control switch is located at
the lower part of the instrument panel.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPA1829
Foldable outside mirrors
Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the
rear of the vehicle.
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone
systems
Safety note....................................................... 4-2
RearView monitor (if so equipped) ......................... 4-2
How to read the displayed lines......................... 4-3
How to adjust the screen................................. 4-4
Center ventilators........................................... 4-5
Side ventilators.............................................. 4-5
Heater and air conditioner .................................... 4-6
Manual air conditioner (if so equipped)................ 4-6
Automatic air conditioner (if so equipped) .......... 4-10
Operating tips ............................................. 4-12
In-cabin microfilter........................................ 4-12
Servicing air conditioner ................................ 4-12
Audio system .................................................. 4-13
Audio operation precautions ........................... 4-13
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player
(Type B)..................................................... 4-29
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)
player........................................................ 4-35
CD care and cleaning ................................... 4-41
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) ........................................... 4-41
Antenna ..................................................... 4-42
Car phone or CB radio...................................... 4-44
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(if so equipped) ............................................... 4-44
Regulatory information................................... 4-46
Using the system ......................................... 4-46
Control buttons ........................................... 4-48
Getting started ............................................ 4-49
List of voice commands ................................. 4-50
Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode ....................... 4-54
Troubleshooting guide ................................... 4-56
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player
(Type A)..................................................... 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
SAFETY NOTE
When the selector lever is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows
the view to the rear of the vehicle.
because of its monitoring range
limitation.
WARNING
.
.
Do not put anything on the rear view
camera.
.
.
Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in
accidents, fire, or electric shock.
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to help avoid
damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect
small objects below the bumper and may not
detect objects close to the bumper or on the
ground.
When washing the vehicle with
high-pressure water, be sure not to
spray it around the camera. Other-
wise, water may enter the camera
unit causing water condensation on
the lens, a malfunction, fire or an
electric shock.
Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in
accident, fire or electric shock.
WARNING
.
In case you notice any foreign
object in the system hardware, spill
liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell
coming from it, stop using the
system immediately and contact
your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignor-
ing such conditions may lead to
accidents, fire, or electric shock.
.
.
The rear view camera is a conve-
nience but it is not a substitute for
proper backing up. Always turn and
check that it is safe to do so before
backing up. Always back up slowly.
.
Do not strike the camera. It is a
precision instrument. Otherwise, it
may malfunction or cause damage
resulting in a fire or an electric
shock.
Objects viewed in the RearView
Monitor differ from actual distance
because a wide-angle lens is used.
Objects in the RearView Monitor
will appear visually opposite than
when viewed in the rear view and
outside mirrors.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to operate the system in
extreme temperature conditions [below
−48F (−208C) and above 1588F (708C)].
Operating this system under these condi-
tions may result in system malfunctions.
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the lens.
.
.
Make sure that the back door is
securely closed when backing up.
Underneath the bumper and the
corner areas of the bumper cannot
be viewed on the RearView Monitor
4-2 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
*
Vehicle width guide lines
:
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
SAA2776
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
A
*
bumper line
are displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
SAA2777
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
Backing up on a steep uphill
1
.
.
.
.
Red line
: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
*
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to
A
2
*
Yellow line
Green line
Green line
: approx. 3 ft (1 m)
3
: approx. 7 ft (2 m)
: approx. 10 ft (3 m)
*
4
*
the place
distance on the hill is the place
, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)
*
B
. Note that
*
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor
further than it appears.
any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor
closer than it appears.
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN
To adjust the Brightness and Contrast of the
RearView Monitor, push the SETTING button
until the desired mode is displayed with the
RearView Monitor on, and turn the TUNE control
dial to adjust the brightness and contrast of the
screen to the preferred level.
OPERATING TIPS
.
When the selector lever is shifted to the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor screen auto-
matically changes to the RearView Monitor
mode. However, the radio can be heard.
.
It may take some time until the RearView
Monitor or the normal screen is displayed
after the selector lever has been shifted to R
from another position or to another position
from R. Objects may be distorted momenta-
rily until the RearView Monitor screen is
displayed completely.
SAA2778
.
.
When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display
objects. This is not a malfunction.
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown further than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to
A
When strong light directly enters the cam-
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.
This is not a malfunction.
the place
distance on the hill is the place
, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)
*
B
. Note that
*
4-4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VENTILATORS
.
Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
.
.
The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from those of
the actual object.
.
.
.
Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night. This is not a
malfunction.
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
the RearView Monitor may not clearly dis-
play objects. Clean the camera.
SAA2344
SAA2343
SIDE VENTILATORS
CENTER VENTILATORS
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discolora-
tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent
and then wipe with a dry cloth.
Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators as
illustrated.
Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction
of ventilators as illustrated.
:
This symbol indicates that the vents are
closed.
.
.
Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
:
This symbol indicates that the vents are
open.
Do not use wax on the camera window.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with mild detergent diluted with
water.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
WARNING
.
.
The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. On
hot, sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people or
animals.
SAA2345
1. Rear window defroster
button (See “REAR
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER (if so
.
Do not use the recirculation mode
for long periods as it may cause the
interior air to become stale and the
windows to fog up.
WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROS-
TER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and con-
trols” section.)
equipped)
Controls
2. Fan speed control
dial
Outside air circulation:
3. A/C (Air Conditioner) button
4. Air flow control dial
Start the engine and operate the heater and the
air conditioner system.
Push the air recirculation
the indicator light on the button. The air flow is
drawn from outside the vehicle.
button to turn off
5. Air recirculation
button
6. Temperature control dial
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, turn the
Air recirculation:
fan speed control
position.
dial to the OFF (0)
Push the air recirculation
button to turn on
the indicator light on the button. The air flow is
circulated inside the vehicle.
4-6 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.
dial to the
Air flow control:
Fan speed control:
Turn the air flow control dial to change the air
flow mode.
Turn the fan speed control
increase the fan speed.
dial clockwise to
dial counter-
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position between the middle and the
hot (right) position.
—
Air flows from the center and side
ventilators.
Turn the fan speed control
clockwise to decrease the fan speed.
Ventilation:
—
Air flows from the center and side
ventilators and foot outlets.
A/C (Air Conditioner) operation:
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center ventilators.
Push the A/C button to turn on or off the air
conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the
A/C indicator light on the button illuminates.
—
—
Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.
1. Push the air recirculation
button to
Air flows from the defroster and foot
outlets.
switch to the outside air circulation mode.
(The indicator light turns off.)
Temperature control:
—
Air flows mainly from the defroster
outlets.
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature. Turn the dial between the
middle and the right position (in red) to select
the hot temperature. Turn the dial between the
middle and the left position (in blue) to select the
cool temperature.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
.
When the
or
position is selected,
3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.
dial to the
the air conditioner will automatically turn on.
This will dehumidify the air and help to defog
the windows. The A/C indicator light will
illuminate when the air conditioner automa-
tically turns on. The air conditioner and A/C
indicator light will remain on in all flow
control modes until the A/C button is
pressed or the fan control dial is turned to
off.
Defrosting or defogging:
Heater operation
This mode directs the air to the defroster outlets
to defrost/defog the windows.
Heating:
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets.
2. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.
dial to the
1. Push the air recirculation
button to
.
When the
or
position is selected,
switch to the outside air circulation mode.
(The indicator light turns off.)
the air recirculation mode cannot be turned
on to prevent the windows from being
fogged up.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position between the middle and the
hot (right) position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
To remove frost from the outside surface of
the windshield quickly, turn the temperature
control dial to the maximum hot position and
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
Cooling:
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
Heating and defogging:
the fan speed control
(IIII) position.
dial to maximum
1. Push the air recirculation
button to
This mode heats the interior and defogs the
windows.
switch to the outside air circulation mode.
(The indicator light turns off.)
When the
position is selected, the air
conditioner will automatically turn on. This
will dehumidify the air and help to defog the
windows. The A/C indicator light will illumi-
nate when the air conditioner automatically
turns on. The air conditioner and A/C
indicator light will remain on in all flow
control modes until the A/C button is
pressed or the fan control dial is turned to
off.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.
dial to the
3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.
dial to the
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator
light will illuminate.)
When the
position is selected, the air
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position between the middle and the
cool (left) position.
conditioner will automatically turn on. This will
dehumidify the air and help to defog the
windows. The A/C indicator light will illuminate
when the air conditioner automatically turns on.
The air conditioner and A/C indicator light will
remain on in all flow control modes until the A/C
button is pressed or the fan control dial is turned
to off.
Bi-level heating:
This mode directs cool air from the side and
center vents and warm air from the foot outlets.
When the temperature control dial is turned to
the maximum hot or cool position, the air
between the ventilators and the foot outlets is
the same temperature.
.
For quick cooling when the outside tem-
perature is high, push the air recirculation
button to switch to the air recirculation
mode. (The indicator light turns on.) Be sure
to push the air recirculation button to the
OFF position for normal cooling.
Air conditioner operation
1. Push the air recirculation
button to
.
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
switch to the outside air circulation mode.
(The indicator light turns off.)
The air conditioner system should be operated
for approximately 10 minutes at least once a
month. This helps prevent damage to the air
conditioner system due to the lack of lubrication.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.
dial to the
4-8 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the
position is selected, the air
Dehumidified heating:
conditioner will automatically turn on. This will
dehumidify the air and help to defog the
windows. The A/C indicator light will illuminate
when the air conditioner automatically turns on.
The air conditioner and A/C indicator light will
remain on in all flow control modes until the A/C
button is pressed or the fan control dial is turned
to off.
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the
air.
1. Push the air recirculation
button to
switch to the outside air circulation mode.
(The indicator light turns off.)
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.
dial to the
4. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator
light will illuminate.)
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position between the middle and the
hot (right) position.
Dehumidified defogging:
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the fan speed control
desired position.
dial to the
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
light will illuminate.)
3. Push the temperature control
,
button to set the desired temperature. The
temperature range is between 608F (188C)
and 908F (328C).
4. To set the automatic control mode, perform
one of the following operations.
.
.
When the outside air circulation mode is
on, push and hold the outside air
circulation
button for more than
1.5 seconds.
When the air recirculation mode is on,
push and hold the air recirculation
button for more than 1.5 seconds.
SAA2346
1
2
3
Front defroster
Display*
button
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER (if so
equipped)
When setting the automatic control mode,
both indicator lights will blink twice indicat-
ing that the system is in the automatic
control mode.
Rear window defroster
button (See “REAR
WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROS-
TER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and con-
trols” section.)
Automatic operation (AUTO)
The AUTO mode may be used year-round as the
system automatically controls constant tempera-
ture, air flow distribution and fan speed.
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
4
5
6
7
8
9
AUTO button
Temperature control
Fan speed control
OFF button
,
button
button
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push
the OFF button.
,
Heating (A/C off):
MODE button
Cooling and dehumidified heating:
Air recirculation
button
1. Push the AUTO button. (The AUTO indicator
will be displayed.)
1. Push the AUTO button. (The AUTO indicator
will be displayed.)
10 Outside air circulation
11 A/C (Air Conditioner) button
*: Temperature is displayed 8F (US) or 8C (Canada).
button
2. If the A/C indicator light illuminates, push the
A/C button. (The A/C indicator light will turn
2. If the A/C indicator light does not illuminate,
push the A/C button. (The A/C indicator
4-10 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
off.)
will be selected to improve the defog-
ging performance.
The temperature range is between 608F (188C)
and 908F (328C).
3. Push the temperature control
,
button to set the desired temperature. The
temperature range is between 608F (188C)
and 908F (328C).
Air recirculation:
Manual operation
The manual mode can be used to control the
heater and air conditioner to your desired
settings.
Push the air recirculation
button to change
the air circulation mode. When the indicator light
illuminates, the flowing air is recirculated inside
the vehicle.
.
Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Doing so
may cause the temperature to not be
controlled properly.
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push
the OFF button.
Outside air circulation:
Fan speed control:
Push the outside air circulation
button to
.
If the windows fog up, use dehumidified
heating instead of the A/C off heating.
change the air circulation mode. When the
indicator light illuminates, the flowing air is
drawn from outside the vehicle.
Turn the fan speed control
adjust the fan speed.
,
dial to
Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:
Air flow control:
1. Push the front defroster
indicator light will illuminate.)
button. (The
Automatic air intake control:
Push the MODE button to change the air flow
mode.
To set the automatic control mode, perform one
of the following operations.
2. Turn the temperature control
,
button to set the desired temperature.
—
Air flows from the center and side
ventilators.
.
When the outside air circulation mode is on,
push and hold the outside air circulation
button for more than 1.5 seconds.
.
To remove moisture or fog on the front
window quickly, set the temperature to
the high temperature and the fan speed
to their maximum level.
—
Air flows from the center and side
ventilators and foot outlets.
.
When the air recirculation mode is on, push
—
—
Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.
and hold the air recirculation
more than 1.5 seconds.
button for
.
.
After the windshield is cleared, push the
Air flows from the defroster outlets and
foot outlets.
front defroster
button again. (The
When setting the automatic control mode, both
indicator lights will blink twice indicating that the
system is in the automatic control mode.
indicator light will turn off.)
Temperature control:
When the front defroster
button is
pushed, the air conditioner will auto-
matically turn on to defog the wind-
shield. The outside air circulation mode
Push the temperature control
to set the desired temperature.
,
button
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATING TIPS
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
.
When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. This is not a
malfunction. After the coolant temperature
warms up, air will flow normally from the foot
outlets.
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN is
charged with a refrigerant designed with the
environment in mind. This refrigerant will not
harm the earth’s ozone layer. Special char-
ging equipment and lubricant are required when
servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using
improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause
severe damage to your air conditioner system.
(See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section for air conditioner
system refrigerant and lubricant recommenda-
tions.)
.
The automatic air conditioner is equipped
A
with sensors as illustrated. The sensors
*
B
and
on the instrument panel help
*
maintain a constant temperature. Do not
put anything on or around these sensors.
SAA2368
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
A NISSAN dealer will be able to service your
environmentally friendly air conditioner system.
The air conditioning system is equipped with an
in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,
dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats,
defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the
filter according to the specified maintenance log
shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide. To replace the filter, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
WARNING
The system contains refrigerant under
high pressure. To avoid personal injury,
any air conditioner service should be
done only by an experienced technician
with the proper equipment.
The filter should be replaced if the air flow
decreases significantly or if windows fog
up easily when operating the heater or air
conditioning system.
SAA2369
4-12 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO SYSTEM
function in your NISSAN radio system.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Radio
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the PWR (power/VOL (vo-
lume) control to turn on the radio. If you listen to
the radio with the engine not running, the ignition
switch should be placed in the ACC position.
Reception conditions will constantly change
because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other
vehicles can work against ideal reception.
Described below are some of the factors that
can affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the
device in a different location may reduce or
eliminate the noise.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external
influences. Intermittent changes in reception
quality normally are caused by these external
influences.
SAA0306
Using a cellular phone in or near the
vehicle may influence radio reception
quality.
FM radio reception:
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30
miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single
channel) FM having slightly more range than
stereo FM. External influences may sometimes
interfere with FM station reception even if the
FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The
strength of the FM signal is directly related to the
distance between the transmitter and receiver.
FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting
many of the same characteristics as light. For
example they will reflect off objects.
Radio reception:
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance
radio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the
quality of that reception.
However there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These
characteristics are completely normal in a given
reception area, and do not indicate any mal-
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,
usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter, static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the
treble setting to reduce the treble response.
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped):
When the satellite radio is first installed or the
battery has been replaced, the satellite radio
may not work properly. This is not a malfunction.
Wait more than 10 minutes with the satellite
radio ON and the vehicle away from any metal or
large buildings for the satellite radio to receive all
of the necessary data.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-
flected signals reach the receiver at the same
time. The signals may cancel each other,
resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®
Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
AM radio reception:
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite
radio signal.
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics. AM signals are also
subject to interference as they travel from
transmitter to receiver.
If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite
antenna.
A buildup of ice on the satellite radio antenna
can affect satellite radio performance. Remove
the ice to restore satellite radio reception.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
SAA0480
Compact Disc (CD) player
.
Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD player.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
.
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the
4-14 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
tion.
Unplayable Track:
— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs
— CDs that are not round
— CDs with a paper label
The file is unplayable in this audio
system (only MP3 or WMA CD).
.
.
The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
Interface System for iPod® (vehicles
without USB port) (if so equipped)
The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the passenger compartment
temperature is extremely high. De-
crease the temperature before use.
— CDs that are warped, scratched, or
.
Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on the vehicle audio display. We
recommend using English language char-
acters with an iPod®.
have abnormal edges
.
.
This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs. It has no capabilities to
record or burn CDs.
.
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
.
.
.
Large video podcast files cause slow
responses in the iPod®. The vehicle audio
display may momentarily black out, but it will
soon recover.
If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
Check Disc:
.
.
Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
If the iPod® automatically selects large video
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle audio display may momentarily black
out, but it will soon recover.
— Confirm that the CD is inserted
correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,
scratched, covered with fingerprints,
or that have pin holes may not work
properly.
— Confirm that the CD is not bent or
Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause
a checkmark to be displayed on and off
(flickering). Always make sure that the iPod®
is connected properly.
warped and it is free of scratches.
.
.
The following CDs may not work prop-
erly:
Push Eject:
This is an error due to the temperature
inside the player is too high. Remove
the CD by pushing the EJECT button,
and after a short time reinsert the CD.
The CD can be played when the tem-
perature of the player returns to nor-
mal.
— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
.
.
The iPod nano® (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using the iPod
nano® (2nd Generation).
Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunc-
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on the iPod®.
water, allow the cable and/or connectors to
dry completely before connecting the cable
to the iPod® (wait 24 hours for it to dry).
Compact Disc (CD) with MP3 or WMA
(if so equipped)
The iPod nano® (1st Generation) may remain
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod®.
Explanation of terms:
.
If the connector is exposed to fluids other
than water, evaporative residue may cause a
short between the connector pins. In this
case, replace the cable, otherwise damage
to the iPod® and a loss of function may
occur.
.
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sam-
pling: 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
.
.
If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation
with Dock connector), do not use very long
names for the song title, album name or
artist name to avoid the iPod® from resetting
itself.
.
.
If the cable is damaged (insulation cut,
connectors cracked, contamination such as
liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do
not use the cable and contact a NISSAN
dealer to replace the cable with a new one.
Be careful not to do the following, or the
cable could be damaged and a loss of
function may occur.
When not in use for extended periods of
time, store the cable in a clean, dust free
environment at room temperature and with-
out direct sun exposure.
— Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40
mm) radius minimum).
.
.
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
compressed audio format created by Micro-
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
— Twist the cable excessively (more than
180 degrees).
.
.
Do not use the cable for any other purposes
other than its intended use in the vehicle.
— Pull or drop the cable.
iPod® charging is only possible for devices
that support charging via a FireWire® con-
nection.
— Store objects with sharp edges in the
storage where the cable is stored.
— Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.
* 12V-charge iPod®s are not chargeable with
this system.
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music files.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
.
.
Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if the
cable and/or connectors are wet. It may
damage the iPod®.
* iPod®, iPhone® and FireWire® are trademarks
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
If the cable and connectors are exposed to
4-16 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
.
.
Do not force the memory stick or USB cable
into the USB connector. This could damage
the connector.
.
Do not connect a USB device if a connector
or cable is wet. Allow the cable and/or
connectors to dry completely before con-
necting the USB device. If the connector is
exposed to fluids other than water, evapora-
tive residue may cause a short between the
connector pins.
During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to humidity. If this
occurs, remove the USB device and dehu-
midify or ventilate the USB player comple-
tely.
Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is
called a multisession.
.
.
Large video podcast files cause slow
responses in an iPod®. The vehicle center
display may momentarily black out, but it will
soon recover.
.
.
The USB player sometimes cannot function
when the passenger compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-
perature before use.
.
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, album title,
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
ID3 tag information is displayed on the
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
If an iPod® automatically selects large video
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily
black out, but it will soon recover.
Do not leave USB memory in a place prone
to static electricity or where the air condi-
tioner blows directly. The data in the USB
memory may be damaged.
.
.
Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on an iPod®.
*
Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-
tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States of America
and other countries of Microsoft Corporation
of the USA.
.
.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB
memory stick.
An iPod nano® (1st Generation) may remain
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod®.
A USB device cannot be formatted with this
system. To format a USB device, use a
personal computer.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) (if so
equipped)
This system supports various USB memory
sticks, USB hard drives and iPod® players.
There are some USB devices which may not
be supported with this system.
.
.
An iPod nano® (2nd Generation) will con-
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
.
.
Partitioned USB devices may not be played
correctly.
Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on the vehicle center screen. Using
English language characters with a USB
device is recommended.
An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using the iPod
nano® (2nd Generation)
.
Make sure that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB connector.
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the U.S. and other countries.
.
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3/WMA/
AAC) (if so equipped)
Explanation of terms:
.
.
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
.
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track can reduce the file size by
approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1
kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no
perceptible loss in quality. The compression
reduces certain parts of sound that seem
inaudible to most people.
Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is
called a multisession.
.
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, album title,
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
ID3 tag information is displayed on the
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
.
.
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
compressed audio format created by Micro-
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-
tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States of America
and/or other countries.
SAA1025
Playback order chart
Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or
WMA files is as illustrated.
AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding
(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.
Audio files that have been encoded with
AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver
a higher quality of sound than MP3.
.
The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
4-18 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specification chart (for FM-AM Radio with
Compact Disc (CD) player):
Supported media
Supported file systems
Version
CD, CD-R, CD-RW
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are
not supported.
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
8 kHz - 48 kHz
MP3
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
Supported
versions*1
Version
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
WMA*2
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
32 kHz - 48 kHz
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)
Folder levels
Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
64 characters
Text character number limitation
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16
Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little
Endian)
Displayable character codes*3
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
4-20 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide (for FM-AM Radio
with Compact Disc (CD) player):
Symptom
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before
using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes
and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of
MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time before the music
starts playing.
If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required
before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc.,
might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is
Move immediately to the next song when playing. prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the
next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play
The songs do not play back in the desired order.
in the desired order.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specification chart (for FM-AM-SAT Radio
with Compact Disc (CD) player):
Supported media
Supported file systems
Version
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB2.0
CD, CD-R, CD-RW: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
MPEG1 Audio Layer 3
MP3
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate
Version
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Supported
versions*1
WMA*2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate
Version
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
MPEG-AAC
AAC
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)
AAC tag (AAC only)
CD, CD-R, CD-RW Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Folder levels: 8, Folders 255, Files: 2500 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Folder levels
USB
Memory size: 4GB
4-22 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*3
26 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big
Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide (for FM-AM-SAT
Radio with Compact Disc (CD) player):
Symptom
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the
player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will
be played.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3 (.mp3)”, “.WMA (.wma)”, “.AAC (.aac)” or “.M4A (.m4a)” cannot be played. In addition, the
character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of
compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long time before
the music starts playing.
If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Move immediately to the next song If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright
when playing.
protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.
Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.
The songs do not play back in the
desired order.
4-24 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. RPT (repeat) button
14. TUNE/FF·REW button
FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC
(CD) PLAYER (Type A)
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this
section.
Audio main operation
Head unit:
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
ON·OFF/Volume control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and then push the PWR button while
the system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD
or AUX) which was playing immediately before
the system was turned off. While the system is
on, pushing the PWR button turns the system
off.
SAA2783
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.
1. FM·AM radio band select button
2. CD EJECT button
7. MENU button
8. SEEK/APS (automatic program search) FF (fast
forward)·APS REW (rewind) button
MENU button:
3. CD button
9. RDM (random) button
4. Station and preset select buttons
5. Audio display
Push the MENU button to change the selecting
mode as follows.
10. PWR (power) button/VOL (volume) control knob
11. SCAN tuning button
6. AUX (auxiliary) button
12. AUX IN jack
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The last station played will also come on when
the PWR button is pushed to ON.
station.
to
Station memory operations:
If another audio source is playing when the radio
band select button is pushed, the audio source
will automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will come on.
Push the TUNE
or
or SEEK
or
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6
each for FM1 and FM2) and 6 stations can be
set for the AM band.
button to adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and
Balance to the desired level. Fade adjusts the
sound level between the front and rear speakers
and Balance adjusts the sound between the
right and left speakers.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the radio band select button.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
radio will automatically change from stereo to
monaural reception.
2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,
SCAN or TUNE button.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, push the MENU button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears (normal
mode). Otherwise, the radio or CD display will
automatically reappear after approximately 10
seconds.
TUNE (Tuning):
3. Select the desired station and push and
hold the desired station preset buttons 1 to
6 until a beep sound is heard. (The radio
mutes when the select button is pushed.)
Push the TUNE button
tuning.
or
for manual
SEEK tuning:
For information about adjusting the clock dis-
play, see “CLOCK” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.
4. The station indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete.
Push the SEEK button
low to high or high to low frequencies and to
stop at the next broadcasting station.
or
to tune from
FM-AM radio operation
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
Radio (FM/AM) band select:
SCAN tuning:
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
blows, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low
to high frequencies and stops at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the
button again during this 5 seconds period will
stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain
tuned to that station.
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
Compact Disc (CD) player operation
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and insert the CD into the slot with the
label side facing up. The CD will be guided
automatically into the slot and start playing.
When the radio band select button is pushed
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position, the radio will come on at the station last
played.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
4-26 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After loading the disc, the number of tracks on
the disc will appear on the display.
being played, the CD will play while fast
forwarding or rewinding.
RPT button:
1 Disc Repeat (Normal play) ↔ 1 Track Repeat
RDM button:
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
matically turn off and the CD will play.
When the button is released, the CD will return
to normal play speed.
1 Disc Repeat (Normal play) ↔ 1 Disc Random
The display shows the following symbols:
If the system has been turned off while the CD
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start
the CD.
APS (Automatic Program Search)
FF, APS REW:
(No mark): 1 Disc Repeat
1: 1 Track Repeat
MP3 or WMA CDs are not supported with this
CD player. If an MP3 or WMA CD is inserted
into the slot, the counter on the audio display
automatically advances without sound. However
this is a specification of the CD mechanism and
not a malfunction.
When the
(APS FF) of the SEEK button is
pushed while the CD is being played, the next
track or the current track on the CD will start to
play from its beginning. Push several times to
skip through tracks. The CD will advance the
number of times the button is pushed. (When
the last track on the CD is skipped through, the
first track will be played.)
RDM: 1 Disc Random
CD EJECT:
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.
When this button is pushed while the CD is
being played, the CD will come out and the
system will turn off.
When the
(APS REW) button is pushed,
CD PLAY:
the track being played returns to its beginning.
Push several times to skip back through tracks.
The CD will go back the number of times the
button is pushed.
When the CD button is pushed with the system
off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on
and the CD will start to play.
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
will be pulled back into the slot to protect
it.
When the CD button is pushed with the CD
loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the CD will start
to play.
REPEAT (RPT)/RANDOM
(RDM) play:
SCAN tuning:
When the RPT or RDM button is pushed while a
CD is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed while
the CD is being played, the beginning of all the
tracks of the CDs will be played for 10 seconds
in sequence.
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind):
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind) of
the TUNE button is pushed while the CD is
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pushing the button again during this 10 second
period will stop SCAN tuning.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within
10 seconds, SCAN tuning continues to move to
the next CD track.
AUX (Auxiliary) input
AUX IN jack:
The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from a
portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or
laptop computer.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
Push the AUX button to play a compatible
device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
When the AUX button is pushed with no device
plugged into the jack, the audio system does not
change to the AUX mode (the AUX button is
invalid).
4-28 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. ENTER button
14 BACK button
15. PWR (power) button/VOL (volume) control knob
16 AUX IN jack
17. AUDIO button
18. TUNE/FF·REW button
19. SCAN/RPT (repeat) button
FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC
(CD) PLAYER (Type B)
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this
section.
Audio main operation
Head unit:
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
ON·OFF/Volume control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and then push the PWR button while
the system is off to call up the normal mode
(radio, CD, AUX and iPod®) which was playing
immediately before the system was turned off.
While the system is on, pushing the PWR button
turns the system off.
SAA2782
1. MUTE button
7. AUX (auxiliary) button
8. Audio display
2. DISP (display)/TEXT button
3. FM·AM radio band select button
4. CD PLAY button
9. CLOCK button
10. CD EJECT button
11. iPod® MENU button
12. SEEK/TRACK button
5. Station preset buttons
6. iPod® button
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
desired level, push the AUDIO button repeatedly
until the normal mode display reappears. Other-
wise, the normal mode display will automatically
reappear after approximately 5 seconds.
MUTE button:
TUNE (Tuning):
Push the TUNE button or
tuning. To move quickly through the stations,
push and hold the TUNE button.
for manual
Push the
button to mute the audio sound.
button again to release the mute
Push the
setting.
CLOCK button:
SEEK tuning:
Push the CLOCK button to turn on or off the
CLOCK display.
AUDIO button:
Push the SEEK button
or
to tune from
Push the AUDIO button to change the selecting
mode as follows.
low to high or high to low frequencies and to
stop at the next broadcasting station.
See “CLOCK” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section for the detailed clock adjust-
ment operation.
SCAN tuning:
Radio operation
Push the SCAN button to tune from low to high
frequencies and stops at each broadcasting
station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again
during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN
tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that
station.
Push the TUNE (
,
) or SEEK (
,
Radio (FM/AM) band select:
) button to adjust Bass and Treble to the
desired level. Use the TUNE or SEEK button
also to adjust Fade or Balance modes. Fade
adjusts the sound level between the front and
rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound
between the right and left speakers.
Pushing the FM·AM radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
radio will automatically change from stereo to
monaural reception.
To turn the beep sound off or on, push the TUNE
or SEEK button until the desired mode is
displayed. This turns on or off the beep sound
when audio buttons are pushed.
to
Station memory operations:
When the radio band select button is pushed
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position, the radio will come on at the station last
played.
12 stations can be set for the FM band (6 each
for FM1 and FM2), and 6 can be set for the AM
band for easy access.
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (Spd
Sen Vol) mode to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH,
push the TUNE or SEEK button until the desired
mode is displayed.
1. Choose the radio band using the radio band
select button.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
4-30 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,
SCAN or TUNE button.
sical”, “Country” or “Rock”.
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
matically turn off and the CD will play.
.
Traffic reports about delays or construction.
3. Push and hold the desired radio station
If the system has been turned off while the CD
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start
the CD.
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
RDS icon is displayed.
preset button
to
until a beep sound is
heard. (The radio mutes when the radio
station preset button is pushed.)
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.
RADIO DISPLAY change:
4. The station indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete.
When the DISP button is pushed during the FM
radio mode, the radio display will change in the
following order.
CD PLAY:
When the CD button is pushed with the system
off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on
and the CD will start to play.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
FM radio:
Frequency ↔ PS/PTY
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
When the CD button is pushed with the CD
loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the CD will start
to play.
In the FM radio mode, pressing the DISP button
will switch the frequency display to the PTY
display (if available), and if the DISP button is
not pushed again within 5 seconds, it will
automatically switch to the PS display. If PTY
is not available, pressing the DISP button will
only switch between the frequency display and
the PS display.
Radio Data System (RDS):
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a
data information service transmitted by some
radio stations on the FM band (not AM band)
encoded within a regular radio broadcast.
Currently, most RDS stations are in large cities,
but many stations are now considering broad-
casting RDS data.
CD play information:
When the DISP button is pushed for less than
1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the
disc information display will change as follows:
Compact Disc (CD) player operation
CD:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and insert the CD into the slot with the
label side facing up. The CD will be guided
automatically into the slot and start playing.
RDS can display:
.
.
.
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
Station name, such as “The Groove”.
Music or programming type such as “Clas-
After loading the disc, the number of tracks on
the disc will appear on the display.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD with MP3 or WMA:
APS (Automatic Program
Search) FF, APS REW:
RANDOM (RDM)/REPEAT (RPT):
When the RPT button is pushed for less than
1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:
When the
(APS FF) button is pushed while
the CD is being played, the program next to the
present one will start to play from its beginning.
Push several times to skip through programs.
The CD will advance the number of times the
button is pushed. (When the last program on the
CD is skipped through, the first program will be
played.)
CD:
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-
wind):
CD:
CD with MP3 or WMA:
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind)
When the
(APS REW) button is pushed,
button is pushed while the CD is being played,
the CD will play while fast forwarding or
rewinding. When the button is released, the
CD will return to normal play speed.
the program being played returns to its begin-
ning. Push several times to skip back through
programs. The CD will go back the number of
times the button is pushed.
CD EJECT:
CD with MP3 or WMA:
SCAN tuning:
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for
more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being
played, the beginning of all the tracks of CD will
be played for 10 seconds in sequence.
than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,
the folders in the CD will change.
When this button is pushed while the CD is
being played, the CD will come out and the
system will turn off.
When the
or
button is pushed for
more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being
played, the CD will play while forwarding or
rewinding. When the button is released, the CD
will return to the normal play speed.
Pushing the button again during this 10 second
period will stop SCAN tuning.
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
will be pulled back into the slot to protect
it.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within
10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
disc program.
4-32 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
iPhone® 3G may not work with the system in
some cases.
To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet,
fully depress the center connector button to
unlatch the connector and pull the connector
straight out of the outlet. To disconnect the
cable from the iPod®, fully depress the side
connector buttons and pull the iPod® connector
straight out of the iPod®.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated.
* 12V-charge iPod®s are not chargeable with
this system.
iPod® button:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Then, push the iPod® button to switch
to the iPod® mode.
* iPod®, iPhone® and FireWire® are a trademark
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
If another audio source is playing and the iPod®
is connected, pushing the iPod® button changes
to the iPod® mode.
Compatibility:
SAA2352
The following models are available:
Interface system for iPod® operation
Connecting iPod®:
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start
the iPod®.
.
Third generation iPod® (Firmware version
2.3 or later) (Audiobook and Podcast are not
available)
The iPod® outlet connector is on the lower
center of the instrument panel. Connect the
Top menu item selecting:
.
.
Fourth generation iPod® (Firmware version
3.1.1 or later)
1
cable
as illustrated, and then connect the
*
other end of the cable to your iPod®
. Your
When the iPod® MENU button is pushed while
the iPod® is connected, the interface for iPod®
operation is shown on the audio display. The
items on the menu list can be scrolled by
2
*
Fifth generation iPod® (Firmware version
1.1.2 or later)
vehicle is equipped with the specialized cable
for connecting the iPod® to your vehicle audio
unit. The battery of your iPod® is charged while it
is connected to the vehicle if the iPod® supports
charging via a FireWire® connection.
.
.
.
iPod mini® (Firmware version 1.41 or later)
iPod photo® (Firmware version 1.2.1 or later)
iPod nano® (Firmware version 1.2 or later)
pushing the SEEK button
TUNE button or
or
and the
while the iPod® is
operational. To select an item, push ENTER. The
display can be changed as follows:
When the connection is complete, a NISSAN
logo will be displayed on the iPod® and an iPod®
icon on the audio display illuminates. While
connecting the iPod® to the vehicle, the iPod®
The fourth generation iPod nano®, iPod touch®,
the second generation iPod classic® and
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Except Podcast and Audiobook:
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-
wind) button:
For more information about each item, see the
iPod® Owner’s Manual.
When the
or
button is pushed for
more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is
playing, the iPod® will play while fast forwarding
or rewinding. When the button is released, the
iPod® will return to the normal play speed.
Podcast:
ALL REPEAT ↔ TRACK REPEAT
Audiobook:
BACK, ENTER button:
.
When the ENTER button is pushed while
the top menu is displayed, program details
are shown on the audio display.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
next track or the beginning of the current track
on the iPod® will be played.
.
.
To select the program, push to search using
AUX (Auxiliary) input
the SEEK
or
and ENTER button.
AUX IN jack:
When the BACK button is pushed, it returns
to the previous display.
APS (Automatic Program
Search) FF, APS REW button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from a
portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or
laptop computer.
iPod® play information:
When the
or
button is pushed for
more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is
playing, numbers of tracks can be skipped
through.
When the DISP button is pushed while a
program is being played, the program informa-
tion display will change as follows:
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
When the
or
button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while iPod® is playing, the next
track or the beginning of the current track on the
iPod® will be played.
With an AUX device plugged in, push the AUX
button repeatedly until the display changes to
the AUX mode.
* Artist Name will not be displayed for a Podcast.
When the AUX button is pushed with no device
plugged into the jack, the audio system does not
change to the AUX mode.
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
When the RPT button is pushed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:
4-34 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. AUX IN jack
14. TUNE/SCROLL CONTROL dial
15. ENTER/SETTING button
FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this
section.
No satellite radio reception is available when the
SAT band option is selected unless the optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed, and
there is an active XM Satellite Radio subscrip-
tion.
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM
Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
It may take some time to receive the activation
signal after subscribing the XM Satellite Radio.
After receiving the activation signal, an available
channel list will be automatically updated in the
radio. For XM, push the ignition switch from
LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.
SAA2779
1. CD RDM (random) play button
2. Radio SCAN tuning button
7. CD EJECT button
Audio main operation
8. Radio CAT (category)/FF (fast forward) button for
SEEK/TRACK
Head unit:
3. Radio station preset select buttons
4. CD RPT (repeat) play button
9. ON·OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob
10. FM·AM band select button
11. CD button
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
5. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) button for
SEEK/TRACK
6. iPod® MENU button
12. AUX (auxiliary) button
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
displayed.
When the radio band select button is pushed
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position, the radio will come on at the channel
last played.
ON·OFF/Volume control:
Turn the TUNE control dial to adjust the bright-
ness and contrast of the screen to the preferred
level.
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, and then push the ON·OFF button
while the system is off to turn on the last audio
source (i.e. FM or CD), which was playing
immediately before the system was turned off.
While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF
button turns the system off.
The last channel played will also come on when
the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.
See “CLOCK” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section for the detailed clock adjust-
ment operation.
The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
Switching the display:
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.
If another audio source is playing when the radio
band select button is turned to ON, the audio
source will automatically be turned off and the
last radio channel played will come on.
Pushing the AUX button will switch the displays
as follows:
SETTING button:
XM1 ? XM2 ? iPod®/USB ? AUX ? XM1
Push the button to change the selecting mode
as follows.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
radio will automatically change from stereo to
monaural reception.
FM-AM-SAT radio operation
radio (FM/AM) band select:
TUNE (Tuning):
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
.
For AM and FM radio
Turn the radio TUNE dial for manual tuning.
For XM Satellite Radio
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
.
Push the TUNE control dial to adjust Bass and
Treble to the desired level. Use the TUNE
control dial also to adjust Fade or Balance
modes. Fade adjusts the sound level between
the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts
the sound between the right and left speakers.
radio (SAT) band select:
Turn the radio TUNE dial to seek channels
from all of the categories when any category
is not selected.
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (Spd
Sen Vol) mode from off (0) to 5, and push the
TUNE control dial until the desired mode is
4-36 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Choose the radio band using the radio band
select button.
If the system has been turned off while the CD
was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will
start the CD.
SEEK tuning/CATEGORY
(CAT):
2. Tune to the desired station/channel using
the SEEK/CAT, SCAN button or the radio
TUNE dial.
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.
.
.
For AM and FM radio
Push the SEEK button
or
to tune
PLAY:
3. Push and hold the desired station preset
from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
1
*
6
*
button
to
until the radio mutes.
When the CD button is pushed with the system
off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on
and the CD will start to play.
4. The station indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete.
For XM Satellite Radio
Push the SEEK button
or
to tune
When the CD button is pushed with the CD
loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the CD will start
to play.
to the first channel of the next or previous
category.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
SCAN tuning:
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations/channels.
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low
to high frequencies and stop at each broad-
casting station/channel for 5 seconds. Pushing
the button again during this 5 seconds period
will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain
tuned to that station/channel.
Next/Previous Track and Fast
Forward/Rewind:
Compact Disc (CD) player operation
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind)
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into
the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will
be guided automatically into the slot and start
playing.
button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds
while the CD is being played, the CD will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the CD will return to normal
play speed.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station/channel.
After loading the CD, the number of tracks on
the CD and the play time will appear on the
display.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
1
*
6
*
to
Station memory operations:
than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,
the next track or the beginning of the current
track on the CD will be played.
12 stations/channels can be set for the FM band
(6 each for FM1 and FM2), 12 for XM radio (6
each for XM1 and XM2) and 6 stations can be
set for the AM band.
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
matically turn off and the CD will play.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
being played, the CD will be ejected.
REPEAT (RPT):
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
will be pulled back into the slot to protect
it.
When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is
played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
AUX (Auxiliary) input
(CD)
AUX IN jack:
Normal Û 1 Track Repeat
(CD with compressed audio files)
The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from a
portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or
laptop computer.
Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat ?
Normal
RANDOM (RDM):
SAA2780
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
When the RDM button is pushed while a CD is
being played, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:
USB memory operation
When the AUX button is pushed with no device
plugged into the jack, the audio system does not
change to the AUX mode.
Audio main operation:
(CD)
The USB outlet connector is on the lower center
of the instrument panel. Open the lid and
connect a USB memory as illustrated. Then,
switch to the USB memory mode automatically.
Normal Û 1 Disc Random
(CD with compressed audio files)
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL
control knob will start the USB memory.
Normal ? 1 Disc Random ? 1 Folder Random
? Normal
CD EJECT:
PLAY:
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.
When the AUX button is pushed with the system
off and the USB memory inserted, the system
will turn on.
When this button is pushed while the CD is
4-38 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If another audio source is playing and a USB
memory is inserted, push the AUX button
repeatedly until the center display changes to
the USB memory mode.
REPEAT (RPT):
When the RPT button is pushed while the USB
memory is played, the play pattern can be
change as follows.
Next/Previous File and Fast
Forward/Rewind:
To change the play mode, push the RPT button
repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.
When the
(Rewind) or
(Fast Forward)
Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat ?
button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds
while a USB memory is being played, the USB
memory will play while forwarding or rewinding.
When the button is released, the USB memory
will return to normal play speed.
Normal
RANDOM (RDM):
When the RDM button is pushed while a USB
memory is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows.
SAA2781
When the
or
button is pushed for less
iPod® player operation
Connecting iPod®:
than 1.5 seconds while the USB memory is
being played, the next track or the beginning of
the current track on the USB memory will be
played.
To change the play mode, push the RDM button
repeatedly, and the mode will change as follows.
The USB outlet connector is on the lower center
of the instrument panel. Open the lid and
connect the iPod® cable to the USB connector.
The battery of the iPod® is charged while the
connection to the vehicle.
Normal ? All Random ? 1 Folder Random ?
Normal
The multi-function controller can also be used to
select tracks when the USB memory is being
played.
Folder selection:
Depending on the version of the iPod®, the
display on the iPod® shows a NISSAN or
Accessory Attached screen when the connec-
tion is completed. When the iPod® is connected
to the vehicle, the iPod® music library can only
be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To change to another folder in the USB memory,
turn the folder selector or choose a folder
displayed on the screen using the multi-function
controller.
* iPod® and iPhone® are a trademark of Apple
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility:
iPod® MENU button:
Next/Previous Track and Fast
Forward/Rewind:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Then, push the iPod® button to switch
to the iPod® mode.
The following models are available:
When the
or
button is pushed for
more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is
playing, the iPod® will play while fast forwarding
or rewinding. When the button is released, the
iPod® will return to the normal play speed.
.
.
.
Fifth generation iPod® (version 1.2.1 or later)
iPod Classic® (version 1.1 or later)
If another audio source is playing and the iPod®
is connected, pushing the iPod® button changes
to the iPod® mode.
First generation iPod touch® (version 2.1 or
later)
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start
the iPod®.
When the
or
button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
next track or the beginning of the current track
on the iPod® will be played.
.
.
.
First generation iPod nano® (version 1.3.1 or
later)
When the iPod® MENU button is pushed while
the iPod® is connected, the interface for iPod®
operation is shown on the audio display. The
items on the menu list can be scrolled by
Second generation iPod nano® (version
1.1.3 or later)
The multi-function controller can also be used to
select tracks when the iPod® is playing.
Third generation iPod nano® (version 1.1 or
later)
pushing the
or
while the iPod® is
REPEAT (RPT):
operational. To select an item, push ENTER. The
display can be changed as follows:
Make sure that the iPod® version is updated.
When the RPT button is pushed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:
Audio main operation:
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button
repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.
Repeat Off ? Repeat One ? Repeat All ?
Repeat Off
For more information about each item, see the
iPod® Owner’s Manual.
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will
start the iPod®.
Random (RDM):
When the RDM button is pushed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:
Shuffle Off ? Shuffle Songs ? Shuffle Albums
4-40 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
SAA0451
SAA2349
1. SOURCE select switch
2. VOLUME control switch
3. Tuning switch
CD CARE AND CLEANING
.
.
.
Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the
surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)
Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
The audio system can be operated using the
controls on the steering wheel.
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
SOURCE select switch
With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or
ON position, push the SOURCE select switch
to turn the audio system on.
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
Push the SOURCE select switch to change the
mode.
.
A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM, FM, CD, AUX, iPod® (if so equipped) and
SAT (if so equipped)
within one program or there is no interval
between programs, the system may not stop in
the desired or expected location.
ANTENNA
If no CD is loaded or AUX and/or iPod® are not
connected, the CD, AUX and/or iPod® modes
will be skipped.
CAUTION
FOLDER change (CD with MP3 or WMA):
.
To avoid damaging or deforming the
antenna, be sure to fold down (if so
equipped) or remove the antenna
under the following conditions.
Push the tuning switch for more than 1.5
seconds to change the folders (if there are any
folders).
VOLUME control switch
Push up or down the VOLUME control switch to
increase or decrease the volume.
— The vehicle enters a garage with
a low ceiling.
Tuning switch
— The vehicle is covered with a car
cover.
Memory change (radio):
.
.
Be sure that antenna is removed
before the vehicle enters an auto-
matic car wash.
Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5 seconds
to change the next or previous radio preset.
SEEK tuning (radio):
Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation. Otherwise,
the antenna rod may break during
vehicle operation.
Push the tuning switch for more than 1.5
seconds to seek the next or previous radio
station.
APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS
REW (CD and iPod®):
Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5 seconds
to return to the beginning of the present
program or skip to the next program. Push
several times to skip back or skip through
programs.
This system searches for the blank intervals
between selections. If there is a blank interval
4-42 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
clockwise and tighten.
SAA2102
For FM-AM-SAT radio
.
To remove the antenna, hold the bottom of
the antenna and turn it counterclockwise.
.
To install the antenna, turn the antenna
clockwise and tighten.
SAA1236
For FM-AM radio
.
.
.
Adjust the angle of the antenna for the best
reception.
To remove the antenna, hold the bottom of
the antenna and turn it counterclockwise.
To install the antenna, turn the antenna
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a car phone or a CB radio in
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
precautions, otherwise the new equipment may
adversely affect the electronic control modules
and electronic control system harness.
CAUTION
WARNING
.
.
Keep the antenna as far away as
possible from the electronic control
modules.
.
.
Use a phone after stopping your
vehicle in a safe location. If you
have to use a phone while driving,
exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.
WARNING
Keep the antenna wire more than 8
in (20 cm) away from the electronic
control system harness. Do not
route the antenna wire next to any
harness.
.
.
A cellular telephone should not be
used while driving so full attention
may be given to vehicle operation.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use
of cellular telephones while driving.
If you find yourself unable to devote
full attention to vehicle operation
while talking on the phone, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle before doing so.
.
Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the man-
ufacturer.
If you must make a call while your
vehicle is in motion, the hands-free
cellular phone operational mode (if
so equipped) is highly recom-
mended. Exercise extreme caution
at all times so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
.
.
Connect the ground wire from the
CB radio chassis to the body.
CAUTION
For details, consult a NISSAN deal-
er.
To avoid draining the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
.
If a conversation in a moving vehicle
requires you to take notes, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle before doing so.
4-44 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hands-Free Phone System.
.
.
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.
com/bluetooth for a recommended phone
list and instructions for connecting your
phone.
You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone
service area.
— Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive radio waves; such as in
a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a
mountainous area.
SAA2350
1. Volume control switch −/+
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position with the connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the
vehicle.
2. PHONE SEND
3. PHONE END
4. Microphone
button
button
— Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a
compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone,
you can set up the wireless connection between
your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology,
you can make or receive a hands-free telephone
call in your vehicle.
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth®
cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
.
.
.
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice
during a call.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
Immediately after the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position, it may be
impossible to receive a call for a short
period of time.
.
Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the Bluetooth®
Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-
ing procedure is required. Your phone is
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
surrounded by metal or far away from the in-
vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection dis-
ruption.
*
Modulation: FHSS GFSK 8DPSK, p/
4DQPSK
IC Regulatory information
—
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
*
*
Number of channels: 79
This wireless equipment cannot be used for
any services related to life safety because
there is the possibility of radio interference.
.
While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may
discharge quicker than usual. The Blue-
tooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot
charge cellular phones.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
Bluetooth trademark:
—
This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH® is
a
trademark
.
.
.
If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
seems to be malfunctioning, see “Trouble-
shooting guide” later in this section. You can
also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for
troubleshooting help.
USING THE SYSTEM
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to Visteon
Corporation.
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System.
FCC Regulatory information
—
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-
lized, which takes a few seconds. If the
button is pushed before the initialization com-
pletes, the system will not accept any command.
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding battery charging, cellular phone
antenna, etc.
—
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
This wireless hands-free car kit is based on
Bluetooth technology.
1) this device may not cause interference and
Operating tips
2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device
*
*
Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz
Output power: 7,94 dBm E.I.R.P
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the follow-
ing:
4-46 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
.
.
If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” anytime the system is waiting
for a response.
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands.
Refer to the rules and examples below.
You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
.
Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
— “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
also push and hold the
button for 5
.
.
Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
seconds on the steering wheel at any time to
cancel the VR session. Whenever the VR
session is cancelled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.
— “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
.
Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
Giving voice command
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push
and release the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
.
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, push the volume control switch (+
or −) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
button located on the
— “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
— NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred, and
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given when
the command is accepted.
.
.
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pressing the
wheel.
button on the steering
— NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred.
.
If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example,
.
Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continuing
entering digits, if desired.
.
If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please say again.” Repeat the command in
a clear voice.
press the
button and after the tone say,
Example: 1-800-662-6200
“Call Redial.” Note: The combined com-
mand of Call and (a Name) cannot be used.
— “One eight zero zero”
The system repeats the numbers and
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
prompts you to enter more.
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
— “six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
The voice command “Help” is available at any
time. Please say the “Help” command to get
information about how to use the system.
— “six two zero zero”
.
.
You can say “Star” for “*” and “Pound” for
“#” at any time in any position of the phone
number. (Available only when using the
“Special Dialing” command.)
INFO
.
If you are controlling the telephone system
by voice command for the first time or do not
know the appropriate voice command,
speak “Help”. The system announces the
available commands.
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
— “One five five five one two one two star
one two three”
SAA2351
.
When you speak numbers, you can speak
both “zero” or “oh” for “0”.
Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*”
(available when using the “Special Dialing”
command and the “Send” command during
a call).
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
Manual command selection
Commands can be selected manually. While the
commands are displayed on the audio screen,
select a command by operating the audio tuning
switch, and then push the
command is manually selected, the voice
command function is cancelled. To return to
voice command mode, push the
cancel the current operation, and then perform
the first procedure of voice command.
.
.
Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
the “Special Dialing” command).
PHONE SEND
switch. Once a
Push the
answer an incoming call.
button to initiate a VR session or
Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (available
only when storing a phone book number).
switch to
You can also use the
button to interrupt
system feedback and give a command at once.
See “Making a call by entering a phone
number” later in this section and “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section
for more information.
4-48 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PHONE END
4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the
language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French
(in French). Use the following chart to select
the language.
While the voice recognition system is active,
press the
Press and hold the
button to go back one step.
button for 5 seconds to
quit the voice recognition system at any time.
NOTE:
GETTING STARTED
You must push the
button within 5 seconds to change
the language.
button or the
1. Push the
button on the steering wheel.
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For
additional command options, refer to “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.
The system announces the available com-
mands.
Push
(MODE/
PHONE END)
to select
Push
(TALK/PHONE
SEND) to select
Current lan-
guage
A
2. Say: “Connect Phone”
. The system
*
acknowledges the command and an-
nounces the next set of available commands.
Choosing a language
English
Spanish
French
Spanish
English
English
French
French
Spanish
You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.
B
3. Say: “Add phone”
. The system acknowl-
*
edges the command and asks you to initiate
C
*
pairing from the phone handset
.
To change the language, perform the following.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit www.
nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on
connecting NISSAN recommended cellular
phones.
5. If you decide not to change the language, do
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
VR session will end, and the language will
not be changed.
1. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
2. The system announces: “Press the PHONE
SEND ( ) button for the hands-free
phone system to enter the speaker adapta-
Connecting procedure
NOTE:
tion mode or press the PHONE END (
button to select a different language.”
)
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the pro-
cedure, the procedure will be cancelled.
3. Push the
button.
For information on speaker adaptation, see
“SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE”
later in this section.
4. The system asks you to say a name for the
D
*
phone
.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code, 3-
digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For example,
555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five”
as the 1st group, then “one two one” as the
2nd group, and “three three five four” as the
3rd group. For dialing more than 10 digits or
any special characters, say “Special Dial-
ing”. See “How to say numbers” earlier in
this section, for more information.
Also, if more than one phone is connected
and the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
Making a call by entering a phone
number
When you push and release the
button on
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the
commands in each sub-menu.
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and
announces the available commands.
C
6. Say: “Dial”
. The system acknowledges
*
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
the command and makes the call.
For additional command options, see “LIST OF
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.
1. Push the
button on steering wheel. A
. The system acknowledges
You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands
currently available anytime the system is waiting
for a response.
tone will sound.
Receiving a call
When you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
A
*
2. Say: “Call”
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
A menu item can also be selected by scrolling
the display with the SEEK switch and entering
by pushing the
button.
Once the call has ended, press the
on the steering wheel.
button
B
3. Say: “Phone Number”
. The system
*
acknowledges the command and an-
nounces the next set of available commands.
Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10
digits or any special characters.
If you want to end an action without completing
it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at anytime the
system is waiting for a response. The system will
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session
is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.
NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when you
hear the ring tone, press the button on
the steering wheel to reject the call.
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
the area code in single digit format. If the
system has trouble recognizing the correct
If you want to go back to the previous command,
4-50 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime
the system is waiting for a response.
Phone Number (speak digits)
During a call
*
When prompted by the system, say the number
to call. Refer to “Making a call by entering a
phone number” earlier in this section for more
details.
During a call there are several command options
available. Push the
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter
commands.
button on the steering
Call
C
“Redial”
*
Use the Redial command to call the last number
.
“Help” — The system announces the avail-
able commands.
that was dialed.
.
“Go back/Correction” — The system an-
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
.
.
“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the VR session.
A
Name (a name)
*
If there are entries stored in the phonebook, a
number associated with a name and location
can be dialed.
“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers, “*” or “#”
during a call. For example, if you were
directed to dial an extension by an auto-
mated system:
D
“Call back”
*
Use the Call Back command to dial the number
of the last incoming call within the vehicle.
See “Phonebook (phones without automatic
phonebook download function)” later in this
section to learn how to store entries.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
Say: “Send one two three four.”
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phonebook entry to call. The system
acknowledges the name.
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the VR
session and returns to the call. Say “star” for
“*”, say “pound” for “#”.
If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back”
and ends the VR session.
If there are multiple locations associated with
the name, the system asks the user to choose
the location.
Special Dialing
To dial more than 10 digits or any special
characters, please say “Special Dialing”. When
the system acknowledges the command, the
system will prompt you to speak the number.
.
“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call
command to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to
Once the name and location are confirmed, the
system begins the call.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the cellular phone when privacy is desired.
nication link.
Phonebook (phones without automatic
phonebook download function)
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit www.
nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on
transferring phone numbers from NISSAN re-
commended cellular phones.
A
*
“Transfer Entry”
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
To reconnect a call from the cellular phone
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone sys-
When prompted by the system, say the name
you would like to give the new entry.
tem, push the
button.
The system repeats the number and prompts
you for the next command. When you have
finished entering numbers or transferring an
entry, choose “Store.”
.
“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
NOTE:
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.
B
“Delete Entry”
*
Use the Delete Entry command to delete one
entry from the phonebook. After the system
acknowledges a command, say the name to
delete or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
To enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one
two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this
section for more information.
C
“List Names”
*
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook. The system recites the
phonebook entries but does not include the
actual phone numbers. When playback of the
list is complete, the system returns to the main
menu.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say: “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the
transfer from the phone handset. The new
contact phone number will be transferred from
the cellular phone via the Bluetooth® commu-
Playback of the list can be stopped at any time
by pushing the
button on the steering
4-52 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
wheel. The system ends the VR session.
NOTE:
Recent Calls
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
Phonebook (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)
NOTE:
Phonebook commands are not available
when the vehicle is moving.
A
“List names”
*
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
Use the Recent Calls command to access
outgoing, incoming or missed calls.
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
A
“Outgoing”
*
Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing
For phones that support automatic download of
the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage
entries to the vehicle phonebook. You can say
the name of an entry at this menu to initiate
dialing of that entry.
calls made from the vehicle.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the
button on the steering
B
“Incoming”
*
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming
calls made from the vehicle.
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the
“Record Name” command in this section for
information about recording custom voice tags
for list entries that the system has difficulty
pronouncing.
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
each phone paired with the system. Each name
can have up to 4 locations/phone numbers
associated with it.
C
“Missed”
*
Use the Missed command to list the missed
calls made to the vehicle that were not
answered.
B
“Record name”
*
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the Bluetooth system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
difficulty recognizing. For more information see
“Record Name” in this section.
The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that
the vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This
feature can also be used to record voice tags
to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers.
Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the
system.
Connect Phone
NOTE:
Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
wish to delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle
will also delete that phonebook for that phone.
5. Press the
button.
For information on selecting a different
language, see “Choosing a language” earlier
in this section.
D
“Turn Bluetooth Off”
*
Use the Bluetooth Off command to prevent a
wireless connection to your phone.
6. If the connected phone is already in use, the
system will prompt you to overwrite. Follow
the instructions provided by the system.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of
dialect users to train the system to improve
recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
commands, the users can create a voice model
of their own voice that is stored in the system.
The system is capable of storing a different
speaker adaptation model for each connected
phone.
7. When preparation is complete and you are
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to
enable the Bluetooth® function on the vehicle.
ready to begin, press the
button.
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system.
A
“Add Phone”
*
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” earlier
in this section for more information.
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases have
been recorded.
Training procedure
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location.
10. The system will announce that speaker
adaptation has been completed and the
system is ready.
B
“Select Phone”
*
Use the Select Phone command to select from a
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The
system will list the names assigned to each
phone and then prompt you for the phone you
wish to select. Only one phone can be active at
a time.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine
running, the parking brake on, and the
transmission in Park.
The SA mode will stop if:
.
The
button is pressed for more than 5
seconds in SA mode.
3. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
.
.
The vehicle is driven during SA mode.
C
“Delete Phone”
*
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The
system will list the names assigned to each
phone and then prompt you for the phone you
The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or
LOCK position.
4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE
SEND ( ) button for the hands-free
phone system to enter the speaker adapta-
tion mode or press the PHONE END (
button to select a different language.”
)
4-54 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Home
.
.
.
go back
Training phrases
During the SA mode, the system instructs you to
say the following phrases.
call 3 1 9 0 2
9 7 pause pause 3 0 8
cancel
call 5 6 2 8 0
dial 6 6 4 3 7
(The system will prompt you for each phrase.)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
phonebook new entry
dial 3 0 4 2 9
call back number
call star 2 0 9 5
delete phone
delete call back number
setup pair phone
memo pad play
8 pause 9 3 2 pause 7
delete all entries
call 7 2 4 0 9
dial 8 3 0 5 1
setup change ring tone
4 3 pause 2 9 pause 0
delete redial number
phonebook list names
call 8 0 5 4 1
correction
phonebook delete entry
memo pad record
dial star 2 1 7 0
yes
setup main menu
dial 7 4 0 1 8
memo pad delete
delete
no
select ring tone
Setup change priority
dial 8 5 6 9 2
dial 9 7 2 6 6
call 7 6 3 0 1
Bluetooth on
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom
Solution
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. (See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” earlier in this section.)
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
System fails to interpret the command
correctly.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).
NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the
recognition response for the speaker. (See “SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE” earlier in this section.)
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the
“List Names” command. (See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” earlier in this section.)
The system consistently selects the
wrong entry from the phone book.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-56 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
4-58 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ..................... 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................... 5-2
Three-way catalyst.......................................... 5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 5-3
Rapid air pressure loss.................................... 5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving...................... 5-6
Driving the vehicle............................................ 5-14
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT).......... 5-14
Manual Transmission (MT) .............................. 5-18
Parking brake .................................................. 5-20
Cruise control operations ............................... 5-21
Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-22
Increasing fuel economy .................................... 5-23
Parking/parking on hills...................................... 5-24
Electric power steering system............................ 5-25
Brake system .................................................. 5-26
Braking precautions...................................... 5-26
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...................... 5-26
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ................. 5-28
Cold weather driving......................................... 5-29
Freeing a frozen door lock.............................. 5-29
Anti-freeze.................................................. 5-29
Battery ...................................................... 5-29
Draining of coolant water ............................... 5-29
Tire equipment ............................................ 5-30
Special winter equipment............................... 5-30
Driving on snow or ice .................................. 5-30
Engine block heater (if so equipped)................. 5-30
Ignition switch
(models without Intelligent Key system) ................... 5-7
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)............ 5-7
Manual Transmission (MT) ................................ 5-8
Key positions ................................................ 5-8
Push-button ignition switch
(models with Intelligent Key system) ....................... 5-9
Operating range for engine start function............. 5-9
Push-button ignition switch operation................ 5-10
Push-button ignition switch positions ................ 5-10
Intelligent Key battery discharge ...................... 5-11
Before starting the engine .................................. 5-12
Starting the engine ........................................... 5-12
Models without Intelligent Key system ............... 5-12
Models with Intelligent Key system ................... 5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
dangerous. It can cause uncon-
sciousness or death.
.
If a special body, camper or other
equipment is added for recreational
or other usage, follow the manufac-
turer’s recommendation to prevent
carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle
appliances such as stoves, refrig-
erators, heaters, etc. may also gen-
erate carbon monoxide.)
WARNING
.
If you suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering the vehicle, drive with
all windows fully open, and have the
vehicle inspected immediately.
.
Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. They
could accidentally injure themselves
or others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
.
.
Do not run the engine in closed
spaces such as a garage.
Do not park the vehicle with the
engine running for any extended
length of time.
.
The exhaust system and body
should be inspected by a qualified
mechanic whenever:
sunny days, temperatures in
a
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people or
animals.
.
Keep the back door closed while
driving, otherwise exhaust gases
could be drawn into the passenger
compartment. If you must drive with
the back door open, follow these
precautions:
— The vehicle is raised for service.
— You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from
sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unse-
cured cargo could cause personal
injury.
— You notice a change in the
sound of the exhaust system.
1. Open all the windows.
— You have had an accident invol-
ving damage to the exhaust
system, underbody, or rear of
the vehicle.
2. Set the
air recirculation to off
and the fan control to high to
circulate the air.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
.
If electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass to a trailer
through the seal on the back door or
the body, follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
WARNING
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
.
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless car-
bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is
5-2 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
vehicle inspected promptly by a
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
.
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, dama-
ging the three-way catalyst.
.
.
The exhaust gas and the exhaust
system are very hot. Keep people,
animals or flammable materials
away from the exhaust system com-
ponents.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
.
.
Do not race the engine while warm-
ing it up.
Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
CAUTION
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
.
.
Do not use leaded gasoline. Depos-
its from leaded gasoline will ser-
iously reduce the three-way
catalyst’s ability to help reduce ex-
haust pollutants.
Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-
functions in the ignition, fuel injec-
tion, or electrical systems can cause
overrich fuel flow into the three-way
catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do
not keep driving if the engine mis-
fires, or if noticeable loss of perfor-
mance or other unusual operating
conditions are detected. Have the
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
Starting and driving 5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MON-
ITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section.
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
Additional information
.
The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
WARNING
.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect
a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
.
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble. Driving with under-inflated tires
may permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD
tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn
the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as possi-
ble. (See “FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In
case of emergency” section for
changing a flat tire.)
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
.
.
The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors.
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in
low ambient temperature, check the tire
pressure for all four tires.
CAUTION
.
.
The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with
tire chains or the wheels are buried
in snow.
Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the
windows. This may cause poor re-
ception of the signals from the tire
For additional information, see “Low tire pres-
5-4 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-
OVER
significantly more likely to be injured or
killed than a person properly wearing a
seat belt.
pressure sensors, and the TPMS will
not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. Some examples are:
WARNING
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by
following the procedure below. Please note that
this procedure is only a general guide. The
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
.
.
.
Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering
maneuvers, because these driving practices
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, a loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,
particularly if the loss of control causes the
vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all
times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive
when under the influence of alcohol or drugs
(including prescription or over-the-counter
drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always
wear your seat belt as outlined in the “SEAT
BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do
so.
If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/
AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle back onto the road surface until
vehicle speed is reduced.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-
da.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted or improperly belted person is
Starting and driving 5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
appropriate driving lane.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
either contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire or see “CHANGING A
FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section of this Owner’s Manual.
WARNING
.
If you decide that it is not safe to return
the vehicle to the road surface based on
vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gra-
dually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe
place off the road.
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air
pressure. Losing control of the vehicle
may cause a collision and result in
personal injury.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due
to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure
loss can also be caused by driving on under-
inflated tires.
.
The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire.
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of
alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-
stream reduces coordination, delays
reaction time and impairs judgement.
Driving after drinking alcohol increases
the likelihood of being involved in an
accident injuring yourself and others.
Additionally, if you are injured in an
accident, alcohol can increase the se-
verity of the injury.
.
.
Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
Do not rapidly release the accelera-
tor pedal.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
.
Do not rapidly turn the steering
wheel.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by main-
taining the correct air pressure and visually
inspect the tires for wear and damage. See
“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents.
Although the local laws vary on what is
considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is
that alcohol affects all people differently and
most people underestimate the effects of
alcohol.
If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out”
while driving maintain control of the vehicle by
following the procedure below. Please note that
this procedure is only a general guide. The
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
5-6 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IGNITION SWITCH (models without
Intelligent Key system)
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter,
prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if
your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by
alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the
LOCK position while driving. This may
cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle and could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
SSD0392
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-
MISSION (CVT)
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position
until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, make sure that the selector
lever is in the P (Park) position.
.
When removing the key from the ignition
switch, make sure that the selector lever is in
the P (Park) position.
Starting and driving 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEY POSITIONS
LOCK (0)
The key can only be removed from the ignition
switch at this position.
When the ignition switch cannot be turned to
the LOCK position:
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON
direction.
OFF (1)
The engine is turned off. The power supply is
turned off.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
ACC (2)
4. Remove the key.
The electrical accessory power activates without
the engine turned on.
If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the selector lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position. The selector lever can
be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON
position with the foot brake pedal depressed.
ON (3)
SSD0503
The ignition system and the electrical accessory
power activate without the engine turned on.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT)
The ignition switch includes a device that helps
prevent accidental removal of the key while
driving.
1
There is an OFF position
between the
START (4)
*
LOCK and ACC positions, although it is not
marked on the ignition switch.
The engine starter activates and the engine will
start. The ignition switch, when released, will
automatically turn to the ON position.
The key can only be removed when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position.
CAUTION
To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position
from the ACC or ON position, turn the key to the
OFF position, push the key in, then turn the key
to the LOCK position.
As soon as the engine has started,
release the ignition switch immediately.
1
There is an OFF position
in between the
*
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is
indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.
5-8 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
(models with Intelligent Key system)
.
.
The cargo room area is not included in the
operating range but the Intelligent Key may
function.
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except
in an emergency. (The engine will stop
when the ignition switch is pushed 3
consecutive times or the ignition switch
is pushed and held for more than 2
seconds.) If the engine stops while the
vehicle is being driven, this could lead
to a crash and serious injury.
If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, inside the glove box or
door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not
function.
.
If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent
Key may function.
Before operating the push-button ignition
switch, be sure to move the selector lever to
the P (Park) position.
SSD0436
OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE
START FUNCTION
The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting
the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the
1
*
specified operating range
.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent Key
system’s operating range becomes narrower
and may not function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push
the ignition switch to start the engine.
Starting and driving 5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
illuminates when the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position.
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed
toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:
The ignition switch is equipped with an anti-theft
steering lock device.
1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)
position.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/6 to the right or left from
the straight up position.
2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
3. Open the door. The ignition switch will
change to the LOCK position.
To lock the steering wheel, push the
ignition switch to the OFF position. To
unlock the steering wheel, push the igni-
tion switch.
The selector lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the ignition switch position does not
change from LOCK when pushing the
ignition switch, turn the steering wheel
right and left, then push the ignition switch
again.
SSD0859
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.
OPERATION
When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch
position will change as follows:
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch position
cannot be moved from the LOCK position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the
Intelligent Key.
.
.
.
.
.
Push center once to change to ACC.
Push center two times to change to ON.
Push center three times to change to OFF.
Push center four times to return to ACC.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are
displayed on the meter. (See “WARNING/
INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMIN-
DERS” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.)
ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio, when the engine is not
running.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch position cannot be switched to LOCK
until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
Open or close any door to return to LOCK
during the OFF position.
A
*
The indicator light
on the ignition switch
5-10 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
chime sounds. The engine will start.
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.
After step 3 is performed, when the ignition
switch is pushed without depressing the brake
pedal, the ignition switch position will change to
ACC.
OFF
The engine can be turned off without locking the
steering wheel.
NOTE:
.
When the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC or ON position or the engine is
started by the above procedures, the
Intelligent Key system warning light
may blink in yellow even if the Intelli-
gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is
not a malfunction. To stop the warning
light from blinking, touch the ignition
switch with the Intelligent Key again.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position
until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
CAUTION
SSD0860
Do not leave the vehicle with the push-
button ignition switch in ACC or ON
position when the engine is not running
for an extended period. This can dis-
charge the battery.
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-
CHARGE
.
If the Intelligent Key system warning
light in the meter is blinking in green,
replace the battery as soon as possible.
(See “KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT”
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-your-
self” section.)
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged,
or environmental conditions interfere with the
Intelligent Key operation, start the engine
according to the following procedure:
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent
Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the
Starting and driving 5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
STARTING THE ENGINE
.
.
Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
starts.
MODELS WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY
SYSTEM
.
If the engine is very hard to start
because it is flooded, depress the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Crank the engine for 5 - 6
seconds. After cranking the engine,
release the accelerator pedal. Crank
the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the igni-
tion switch to START. Release the
ignition switch when the engine starts.
If the engine starts, but fails to run,
repeat the above procedure.
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as
frequently as possible, or at least whenever
you refuel.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models:
Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)
.
.
Check that all windows and lights are clean.
Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
The starter is designed so that it does not
operate unless the selector lever is in either
of the above positions.
.
.
.
.
Lock all doors.
Manual Transmission (MT) models:
Position seat and adjust head restraints.
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position. Depress the clutch pedal fully to
the floor.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, turn the ignition switch
off and wait 10 seconds before cranking
again, otherwise the starter could be
damaged.
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
The starter is designed not to operate unless
the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
.
Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position. (See “WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in
the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition
switch to START. Release the switch when
the engine starts. If the engine starts, but
fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after starting. Do not race the
engine while warming it up. Drive at
moderate speed for a short distance first,
especially in cold weather. In cold weather,
keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 -
.
If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restart-
ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little
(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold
it and then crank the engine. Release the
accelerator pedal when the engine
5-12 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and
stopping the engine over a short period of
time may make the vehicle more difficult to
start.
extremely cold weather or when restart-
ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little
(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and
while holding, crank the engine. Release
the accelerator pedal when the engine
starts.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after starting. Do not race the
engine while warming it up. Drive at
moderate speed for a short distance first,
especially in cold weather. In cold weather,
keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 -
3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and
stopping the engine over a short period of
time may make the vehicle more difficult to
start.
5. To stop the engine, move the selector lever
to the P (Park) position (CVT model) or move
the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (MT
model), and turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position.
.
If the engine is very hard to start
because it is flooded, depress the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Push the ignition switch to
the ON position to start cranking the
engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop
cranking by pushing the ignition switch
to OFF. After cranking the engine,
release the accelerator pedal. Crank
the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by depressing the
brake pedal and pushing the push-
button ignition switch to start the engine.
If the engine starts, but fails to run,
repeat the above procedure.
MODELS WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
SYSTEM
When racing the engine up to 4,000 rpm or
more under no load condition, the engine
will enter the fuel cut mode.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)
5. To stop the engine, move the selector lever
to the P (Park) position, and push the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
The starter is designed not to operate unless
the selector lever is in either of the above
positions.
The Intelligent Key must be carried
when operating the ignition switch.
CAUTION
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal and push the
ignition switch to start the engine.
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, push the ignition switch
to OFF and wait 10 seconds before
cranking again, otherwise the starter
could be damaged.
To start the engine immediately, push and
release the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in
any position.
.
If the engine is very hard to start in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 5-13
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed, push
the selector lever button and move the
selector lever to a driving position.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-
MISSION (CVT)
CAUTION
The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
in your vehicle is electronically controlled to
produce maximum power and smooth operation.
.
.
When stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle
by depressing the accelerator pedal.
The foot brake should be used for
this purpose.
3. Release the parking brake and foot brake
pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in
motion.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
WARNING
Do not downshift abruptly on slip-
pery roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
.
Do not depress the accelerator
pedal while shifting from P (Park)
or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D
(Drive) or L (Low). Always depress
the brake pedal until shifting is
completed. Failure to do so could
cause you to lose control and have
an accident.
Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the selector
lever out of the P (Park) position.
.
.
Cold engine idle speed is high, so
use caution when shifting into a
forward or reverse gear before the
engine has warmed up.
This CVT is designed so that the foot
brake pedal must be depressed before
shifting from P (Park) to any driving
position while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
Never shift to P (Park) or R (Re-
verse) while vehicle is moving. Fail-
ure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
The selector lever cannot be moved out
of the P (Park) position and into any of
the other positions if the ignition
switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or
ACC position or if the key is removed.
5-14 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
position.
WARNING
CAUTION
Apply the parking brake if the selector
lever is in any position while the engine
is not running. Failure to do so could
cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly
or roll away and result in serious
personal injury or property damage.
To prevent transmission damage, move
the selector lever to the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position only when the vehi-
cle is completely stopped.
P (Park):
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
ACC position for any reason while the selector
lever is in any positions other than the P (Park),
the ignition switch cannot be placed in the
LOCK position.
Use this selector position when the vehicle is
parked or when starting the engine. Make sure
the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake
pedal must be depressed and the selector
lever button pushed in to move the selec-
tor lever from N (Neutral) or any drive
position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
first, then move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
SSD0862
If the ignition switch cannot be placed in the
LOCK position, perform the following steps:
Shifting
To move the selector lever,
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is
stopped.
A
*
:
Push the button
the brake pedal.
while depressing
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
while depressing the foot brake pedal.
A
:
:
Push the button
.
*
R (Reverse):
Just move the selector lever.
3. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
Use this position to back up. Make sure the
vehicle is completely stopped before selecting
the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal
must be depressed and the selector lever
button pushed in to move the selector
lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any
driving position to R (Reverse).
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal, push the selector lever button and move
the selector lever from the P (Park) position to
any of the desired shift positions.
4. Models with Intelligent Key system:
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Models without Intelligent Key system:
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
Starting and driving 5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N (Neutral):
Accelerator downshift
— In D position —
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the
transmission down into a lower gear, depending
on the vehicle speed.
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.
The engine can be started in this position. You
may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled
engine while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive):
High fluid temperature protection mode
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
This transmission has a high fluid temperature
protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-
comes too high (for example, when climbing
steep grades in high temperature with heavy
loads), engine power and, under some condi-
tions, vehicle speed will be decreased auto-
matically to reduce the chance of transmission
damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with
the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle
speed may be limited.
L (Low):
Use this position for maximum engine braking on
steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes
and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not
use the L (Low) position in any other circum-
stances.
SSD0863
Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch (if so
equipped)
When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the
selector lever in the D (Drive) position, the
indicator light in the instrument panel illuminates.
Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel spin-
ning and subsequent hard braking, the
fail-safe system may be activated. The MIL
may illuminate to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. (See “Malfunction In-
dicator Light (MIL)” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section.) This will occur even
if all electrical circuits are functioning
properly. In this case, place the ignition
switch in the OFF position and wait for 10
seconds. Then turn the switch back to the
Use the overdrive off mode when you need
improved engine braking.
To turn off the overdrive off mode, push the O/D
OFF switch again. The
turn off.
indicator light will
Each time the engine is started, or when the
selector lever is shifted to any position other
than the D (Drive) position, the overdrive off
mode will be automatically turned off.
5-16 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ON position. The vehicle should return to
its normal operating condition. If it does
not return to its normal operating condi-
tion, have a NISSAN dealer check the
transmission and repair if necessary.
2. Apply the parking brake.
A
*
3. Remove the shift lock release cover
using a suitable tool.
4. Push down the shift lock release using a
suitable tool.
WARNING
5. Push the selector lever button and move the
selector lever to the N (Neutral) position
while holding down the shift lock release.
When the high fluid temperature pro-
tection mode or fail-safe operation
occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually
reduced. The reduced speed may be
lower than other traffic, which could
increase the chance of a collision. Be
especially careful when driving. If ne-
cessary, pull to the side of the road at a
safe place and allow the transmission
to return to normal operation, or have it
repaired if necessary.
Place the ignition switch in the ON position to
unlock the steering wheel (if so equipped). The
vehicle may be moved to the desired location.
Replace the removed shift lock release cover
after the operation.
SSD0864
Shift lock release
For models with Intelligent Key system: If the
battery is discharged completely, the steering
wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not move the
vehicle with the steering wheel locked.
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
selector lever may not be moved from the P
(Park) position even with the brake pedal
depressed and the selector lever button pushed.
If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the
P (Park) position, have a NISSAN dealer check
the CVT system as soon as possible.
To move the selector lever, perform the following
procedure:
1. Models with Intelligent Key system:
WARNING
Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position.
If the selector lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position while the
engine is running and the brake pedal
is depressed, the stop lights may not
Models without Intelligent Key system:
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position, and remove the key if it is inserted.
Starting and driving 5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
work. Malfunctioning stop lights could
cause an accident injuring yourself and
others.
light, shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT)
WARNING
.
.
Do not downshift abruptly on slip-
pery roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
Do not over-rev the engine when
shifting to a lower gear. This may
cause a loss of control or engine
damage.
SSD0552
Shifting
To change gears, or when upshifting or down-
shifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into
the appropriate gear, then slowly and smoothly
release the clutch pedal.
CAUTION
.
.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal while driving. This may da-
mage the clutch.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,
3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence accord-
ing to vehicle speed.
Fully depress the clutch pedal be-
fore shifting to help prevent trans-
mission damage.
1
To back up, pull the shift lever ring
upward
*
and then move it to the R (Reverse) gear after
stopping the vehicle completely.
.
.
Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
The shift lever ring returns to its original position
when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral)
position.
When the vehicle is stopped for a
period of time, for example at a stop
5-18 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into the R
(Reverse) or 1st gear, shift to the N (Neutral)
position, and then release the clutch pedal once.
Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift
into the R (Reverse) or 1st gear.
For normal acceleration in high altitude areas
[over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:
Suggested maximum speed in each gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Gear change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
MPH (km/h)
15 (24)
25 (40)
40 (64)
45 (72)
51 (82)
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road
driving, use the highest gear suggested for that
speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and
drive according to the road conditions, which
will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the
engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may
cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
Suggested upshift speeds
The following are suggested vehicle speeds for
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road
conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
Gear
1st
MPH (km/h)
28 (46)
50 (82)
73 (119)
—
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
[less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:
2nd
3rd
4th
Gear change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
MPH (km/h)
8 (13)
17 (27)
25 (40)
36 (58)
51 (82)
5th
—
6th
—
Starting and driving 5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING BRAKE
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON-
TROL
WARNING
.
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
will cancel automatically. The CRUISE in-
dicator light on the meter panel will then
blink to warn the driver.
.
Be sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving. Failure to
do so can cause brake failure and
lead to an accident.
.
.
.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes
excessively high, the cruise control system
will cancel automatically.
.
.
Do not release the parking brake
from outside the vehicle.
Do not use the gear shift in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.
If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control MAIN switch off and have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SPA2110
The CRUISE indicator light may blink when
the cruise control MAIN switch is turned ON
while pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE,
SET/COAST or CANCEL switch. To prop-
erly set the cruise control system, perform
the following procedures.
.
Do not leave children unattended in
a vehicle. They could release the
parking brake and cause an acci-
dent.
1
To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up
To release:
.
*
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. While pulling up on the parking brake lever
2
slightly, push the button
and lower the
*
WARNING
3
*
lever completely
.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving under the following conditions:
3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
.
.
.
when it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed
in heavy traffic or in traffic that
varies in speed
on winding or hilly roads
5-20 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
switch and release it. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the
set speed.
.
.
on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.)
in very windy areas
.
To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously
set speed.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
CAUTION
.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
on winding or hilly roads. If this happens,
drive without the cruise control.
On Manual Transmission (MT) models,
do not shift into N (Neutral) without
depressing the clutch pedal when the
cruise control is set. Should this occur,
depress the clutch pedal and turn the
MAIN switch off immediately. Failure to
do so may cause engine damage.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following methods:
SSD0861
a) Push the CANCEL switch.
b) Tap the brake pedal.
1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch
2. SET/COAST switch
c) Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE
indicator light will turn off.
3. CANCEL switch
4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch
.
If you depress the brake pedal while pushing
the RESUME/ACCELERATE or SET/
COAST switch and reset at the cruising
speed, the cruise control will disengage.
Turn the MAIN switch off once and then turn
it on again.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN
switch on. The CRUISE indicator light will
illuminate.
.
.
The cruise control will automatically cancel if
the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH (12
km/h) below the set speed.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle
to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST
If you move the selector lever to the N
(Neutral) position (Continuously Variable
Starting and driving 5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
Transmission models) or depressing the
clutch pedal (Manual Transmission models),
the cruise control will be canceled.
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising
speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH
(40 km/h).
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to ob-
tain maximum engine performance and
ensure the future reliability and econo-
my of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may
result in shortened engine life and
reduced engine performance.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
.
.
.
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the SET/COAST switch.
Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE
switch. When the vehicle attains the desired
speed, release the switch.
.
Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
Push, then quickly release the RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will increase by about 1
MPH (1.6 km/h).
.
.
.
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
Avoid quick starts.
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
.
.
.
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
SET/COAST switch and release it.
Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle slows
down to the desired speed.
Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed
will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
5-22 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
.
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.
.
Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
(See “ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATION” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section.)
.
.
.
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.
Select a gear range suitable to road condi-
tions.
.
.
.
Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
Keep your engine tuned up.
Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
.
.
.
.
Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire
wear and lowers fuel economy.
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
Air conditioner operation lowers fuel econ-
omy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
Starting and driving 5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
can go and cannot be moved with-
out depressing the foot brake pedal.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models:
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
Manual Transmission (MT) models:
Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) gear.
When parking on an uphill grade, place the
shift lever in the 1st gear.
SSD0488
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
the street when parked on a sloping drive
way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels
as illustrated.
dents.
WARNING
.
Safe parking procedures require
that both the parking brake be
applied and the transmission placed
into P (Park) for Continuously Vari-
able Transmission (CVT) model or in
an appropriate gear for Manual
Transmission (MT) model. Failure
to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and
result in an accident.
.
Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
1
*
.
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
.
.
Never leave the engine running
while the vehicle is unattended.
2
*
.
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:
Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
.
Make sure the continuously variable
transmission selector lever has
been pushed as far forward as it
.
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
3
CURB:
*
5-24 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
SYSTEM
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the
center of the road if it moves.
You may hear a fricative sound when the
steering wheel is operated quickly. However,
this is not a malfunction.
WARNING
.
.
If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
4. Models with Intelligent Key system:
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Models without Intelligent Key system:
If the electric power steering warning light
illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the electric power steering system is
not functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the electric power steering system
checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See “Electric
power steering warning light” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section.)
When the electric power steering
warning light illuminates with the
engine running, the power assist for
the steering will cease operation.
You will still have control of the
vehicle but the steering will be
harder to operate.
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and remove the key.
When the electric power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running, the power
assist for the steering will cease operation. You
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
greater steering effort is needed, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.
The electric power steering system is designed
to provide power assist while driving to operate
the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly
or continuously while parking or driving at a very
low speed, the power assist for the steering
wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent
overheating of the electric power steering
system and protect it from getting damaged.
While the power assist is reduced, steering
wheel operation will become heavy. When the
temperature of the electric power steering
system goes down, the power assist level will
return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering
wheel operations that could cause the electric
power steering system to overheat.
Starting and driving 5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKE SYSTEM
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels.
WARNING
.
.
While driving on a slippery surface,
be careful when braking, accelerat-
ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking
or accelerating could cause the
wheels to skid and result in an
accident.
.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
is a sophisticated device, but it
cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain
vehicle control during braking on
slippery surfaces. Remember that
stopping distances on slippery sur-
faces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping
distances may also be longer on
rough, gravel or snow covered
roads, or if you are using tire chains.
Always maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Ultimately, the driver is responsible
for safety.
You may feel a small click and hear a sound
when the brake pedal is fully depressed slowly.
This is not a malfunction and indicates that the
brake assist mechanism is operating properly.
If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
Braking will be harder.
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and the stopping
distance will be longer.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will cause overheating of the
brakes, wearing out the brake pads and shoes
faster and reduce gas mileage.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up
the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to
normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds
until the brakes function correctly.
.
Tire type and condition may also
affect braking effectiveness.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
— When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
— When installing a spare tire,
make sure that it is the proper
size and type as specified on the
5-26 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This
action is similar to pumping the brakes very
quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or
feel a vibration from the actuator when it is
operating. This is normal and indicates that the
ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa-
tion may indicate that road conditions are
hazardous and extra care is required while
driving.
Tire and Loading Information
label. See “TIRE AND LOADING
INFORMATION LABEL” in the “9.
Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping dis-
tances.
— For detailed information, see
“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-your-
self” section of this manual.
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward
or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may
hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the
brake pedal. This is normal and does not
indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses
a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and
illuminates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then oper-
ates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls
the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to
prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on
slippery surfaces.
Using the system
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from
locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH
(5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to
road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly
Starting and driving 5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs
and vehicle motion. Under certain driving con-
ditions, the VDC system helps to perform the
following functions.
determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in
reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test
occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel
a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and
is not an indication of a malfunction.
.
.
You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
.
Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
WARNING
.
The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but
does not prevent accidents due to
abrupt steering operation at high
speeds or by careless or dangerous
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
speed and be especially careful
when driving and cornering on slip-
pery surfaces and always drive care-
fully.
See “Slip indicator light” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section and “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “2.
Instruments and controls” section.
.
.
Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).
Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following
conditions:
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
and
indicator lights come on in the
instrument panel. The VDC system automatically
turns off when these indicator lights are on.
— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the
steered path despite increased steering
input)
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
system. The VDC off indicator illuminates to
indicate the VDC system is off. When the VDC
switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC
system still operates to prevent one drive wheel
from slipping by transferring power to a non
.
Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
sion. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs,
stabilizer bars, bushings and
wheels are not NISSAN recom-
mended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated the VDC sys-
tem may not operate properly. This
could adversely affect vehicle hand-
— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions).
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss
of vehicle control in all driving situations.
slipping drive wheel. The
if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and
the indicator will not flash. The VDC
indicator flashes
System is automatically reset to on when the
ignition switch is placed in the off position then
back to the on position.
When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes so note
the following:
ling performance, and the
dicator may flash or both
in-
and
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
.
The road may be slippery or the system may
5-28 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
indicator lights may illuminate.
surface.
.
If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extre-
mely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and both
.
.
If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are
used, the VDC system may not
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the
key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob.
operate properly and the
dicator may flash or both
in-
and
ANTI-FREEZE
and
indicator lights may
indicator lights may illuminate.
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
outside temperature will drop below 328F (08C),
check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter
protection. For additional information, see “EN-
GINE COOLING SYSTEM” in the “8. Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.
illuminate.
The VDC system is not a substitute
for winter tires or tire chains on a
snow covered road.
.
.
If engine control related parts are
not NISSAN recommended or are
extremely deteriorated, both the
and
indicator lights may
illuminate.
BATTERY
When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked
corners, the VDC system may not
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the battery
fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To
maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should
be checked regularly. For additional information,
see “BATTERY” in the “8. Maintenance and do-
it-yourself” section.
operate properly and the
dicator may flash or both
in-
and
indicator lights may illuminate.
Do not drive on these types of
roads.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
.
When driving on an unstable sur-
face such as a turntable, ferry,
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM”
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
elevator or ramp, the
may flash or both
indicator
and
indicator lights may illuminate. This
is not a malfunction. Restart the
engine after driving onto a stable
Starting and driving 5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
will lose even more traction.
SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide
superior performance on dry pavement. How-
ever, the performance of these tires will be
substantially reduced in snowy and icy condi-
tions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy
roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &
SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size,
speed rating and availability information.
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
.
Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pave-
ment.
.
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
.
.
Allow greater following distances
on slippery roads.
.
.
.
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a
patch of ice is seen ahead, brake
before reaching it. Try not to brake
while on the ice, and avoid any
sudden steering maneuvers.
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-
drifts.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before
installing studded tires.
Extra window washer fluid to refill the
reservoir tank.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
.
.
Do not use cruise control on slip-
pery roads.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle.
.
Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick
and very hard to drive on. The
vehicle will have much less traction
or “grip” under these conditions. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until the
road is salted or sanded.
Tire chains may be used. For details, see “TIRE
CHAINS” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist in cold
temperature starting.
.
Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or down-
shifting too fast, the drive wheels
The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is 208F (−78C) or lower.
5-30 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the engine block heater
1. Turn the engine off.
starting the engine. Damage to the
cord could result in an electrical
shock and can cause serious injury.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
.
Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least
10A. Plug the extension cord into a
Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-
tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.
Failure to use the proper extension
cord or a grounded outlet can result
in a fire or electrical shock and
cause serious personal injury.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on
outside temperatures, to properly warm the
engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to
turn the engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.
WARNING
.
.
Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical sys-
tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can
be seriously injured by an electrical
shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.
Disconnect and properly store the
engine block heater cord before
Starting and driving 5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
5-32 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 In case of emergency
Flat tire............................................................ 6-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 6-2
Changing a flat tire......................................... 6-2
Jump starting .................................................... 6-8
Towing your vehicle .......................................... 6-12
Towing recommended by NISSAN
¯
(except for Krom models)............................... 6-13
Towing recommended by NISSAN
¯
(for Krom models) ........................................ 6-14
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ........... 6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLAT TIRE
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)
could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD
tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn
the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as possi-
ble.
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you
of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This
system will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For
more details, see “WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section and “TIRE
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake.
4. Continuously Variable Transmission
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
(CVT) models:
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
Manual Transmission (MT) models:
WARNING
Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
position.
.
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble. Driving with under-inflated tires
may permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
5. Turn off the engine.
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
7. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors.
6-2 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
.
Make sure the parking brake is
securely applied and the Manual
Transmission is shifted into R (Re-
verse), or the Continuously Variable
Transmission into P (Park).
.
.
Never change tires when the vehicle
is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.
This is hazardous.
Never change tires if oncoming
traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait
for professional road assistance.
MCE0001A
SCE0810
Jacking tools
Blocking wheels
Getting the spare tire and tools
1
Place suitable blocks
at both the front and
*
Jacking tools:
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat
tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
jacked up.
Slide the driver’s seat forward and the rear seat
in its rear most position, and open the lid located
in the floor behind the driver’s seat.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the
vehicle may move and result in personal
injury.
In case of emergency 6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare tire:
injury.
The spare tire is stored under the rear of the
vehicle.
Spare tire basket bolt tightening torque:
48 to 63 ft-lb (64 to 86 N·m)
1. Open the back door.
1
*
2. Open the bolt cover
.
2
3. Loosen the bolt
*
counterclockwise ap-
proximately 25 turns using the wheel nut
wrench to lower the spare tire.
4. Stop turning the bolt when the tire is
lowered to the place where the tire basket
3
*
4
*
can be removed from the hook
.
Do not loosen the bolt excessively,
otherwise the basket may fall sud-
denly.
5. Hold the tire basket and remove it from the
hook by pushing the basket upward.
6. Lower the tire basket slowly to the ground,
and then take out the spare tire.
WARNING
Properly stow the spare tire basket
after use. Driving without properly
stowing the spare tire basket can cause
contact with the road and cause sparks
or scatter rocks/road debris resulting in
vehicle damage or serious personal
SCE0811
Spare tire
6-4 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
Jacking up the vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING
.
.
Never get under the vehicle while it
is supported only by the jack. If it is
necessary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle
on other vehicles. The jack is de-
signed for lifting only your vehicle
during a tire change.
SCE0630
Removing wheel cover (if so equipped)
.
Use the correct jack-up points.
Never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
WARNING
Never use your hands to remove the
wheel cover. This may cause personal
injury.
.
.
.
Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
Never use blocks on or under the
jack.
1
*
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod
as illustrated.
Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack, as it may
cause the vehicle to move.
2
Apply cloth
between the wheel and jack rod
*
to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.
.
Do not allow passengers to stay in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or
wheel surface.
In case of emergency 6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCE0812
SCE0504
Jack-up point
1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning it counterclockwise with the wheel
nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel
nuts until the tire is off the ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands as shown above.
Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears
the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
then remove the tire.
The jack should be used on level firm
ground.
6-6 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 times, until they are tight.
tightened to specifications at each
lubrication interval.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the
vehicle completely.
.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD
pressure.
COLD pressure:
After the vehicle has been parked for 3
hours or more or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
WARNING
.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label
affixed to the driver side center pillar.
Stowing the damaged tire and the tools
Securely store the jack and tools in the storage
area.
SCE0576
.
.
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts. This could
cause the nuts to become loose.
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. (See specific instructions under the
heading “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600
miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a
flat tire, etc.).
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight. Check that all the
wheel nuts contact the wheel surface
horizontally.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specifications at all times. It is
recommended that the wheel nuts be
1
2
3
4
as illustrated (
,
,
,
), more than
* * * *
In case of emergency 6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be
followed.
WARNING
.
Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can
become dangerous projectiles in an
accident or sudden stop.
WARNING
.
.
.
If done incorrectly, jump starting
can lead to a battery explosion,
resulting in severe injury or death.
It could also damage your vehicle.
.
.
Make sure that the spare tire basket
is properly secured in its original
position after removing the spare
tire.
Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away
from the battery.
The spare tire and small size spare
tire are designed for emergency use.
See specific instructions under the
heading “WHEELS AND TIRES” in
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-your-
self” section.
SCE0828
Do not allow battery fluid to come
into contact with eyes, skin, clothing
or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is
a corrosive sulfuric acid solution
which can cause severe burns. If
the fluid should come into contact
with anything, immediately flush the
contacted area with water.
Securely store the damaged tire in the cargo
area as illustrated.
The spare tire basket cannot be used for the
conventional tire.
Return the spare tire basket to its original
position in the reverse order of removal. (See
“Getting the spare tire and tools” earlier in this
section.)
.
.
Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.
Spare tire basket bolt tightening torque:
48 to 63 ft-lb (64 to 86 N·m)
The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
.
Whenever working on or near a
battery, always wear suitable eye
6-8 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
protectors (for example, goggles or
industrial safety spectacles) and
remove rings, metal bands, or any
other jewelry. Do not lean over the
battery when jump starting.
.
.
Do not attempt to jump start a
frozen battery. It could explode
and cause serious injury.
Your vehicle has an automatic en-
gine cooling fan. It could come on at
any time. Keep hands and other
objects away from it.
SCE0862
3. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models:
WARNING
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause
personal injury.
Manual Transmission (MT) models:
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle
B
A
B
, position the two vehicles (
and
)
*
*
*
4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems
(headlights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).
to bring their batteries into close proximity to
each other.
5. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly
wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion
hazard.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake.
In case of emergency 6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUSH STARTING
Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.
A
6. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as
the engine of the vehicle
started.
being jump
*
1
*
2
*
3
*
4
*
illustrated (
?
?
?
).
CAUTION
For the vehicle equipped with Intelli-
gent Key system:
CAUTION
.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be push-
started or tow-started. Attempting
to do so may cause transmission
damage.
If the battery is discharged, the ignition
switch cannot be moved from the OFF
position and, if the steering lock is
engaged, the steering wheel cannot be
moved. Connect the jumper cables to
B
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, place the
ignition switch in the OFF position and
wait 10 seconds before trying again.
.
.
Three-way catalyst equipped mod-
els should not be started by pushing
since the three way catalyst may be
damaged.
the booster vehicle
the ignition switch and disengaging the
steering lock.
before turning
*
9. After starting your engine, carefully discon-
nect the negative cable and then the positive
4
3
*
2
*
1
cable (
?
?
?
).
*
*
CAUTION
Never try to start the vehicle by
towing it; when the engine starts,
the forward surge could cause the
vehicle to collide with the tow
vehicle.
10. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.
.
.
Always connect positive (+) to posi-
tive (+) and negative (−) to body
ground (for example, as illustrated),
not to the battery.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.
B
*
7. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
8. Keep the engine speed of the booster
B
*
vehicle
at about 2,000 rpm, and start
6-10 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
position.
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not stop the engine.
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine
cooling fan can start at any time.
.
.
Do not continue to drive if your
vehicle overheats. Doing so could
cause engine damage or a vehicle
fire.
3. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).
Open all the windows, move the heater or air
conditioner temperature control to maximum
hot and fan control to high speed.
To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never remove the radiator
cap while the engine is still hot.
When the radiator cap is removed,
pressurized hot water will spurt out,
possibly causing serious injury.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or
coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.)
Do not open the hood further until no steam
or coolant can be seen.
7. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the reservoir with the engine
running. Add coolant to the reservoir if
necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a
NISSAN dealer.
.
Do not open the hood if steam is
coming out.
5. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc., take the following steps:
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road and
apply the parking brake.
6. Visually check the drive belt for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the
engine.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models:
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
Manual Transmission (MT) models:
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
In case of emergency 6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must
be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could
damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are
available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service
operators are familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to
your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you
have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the service operator carefully
read the following precautions.
For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), see “FLAT TOW-
ING” in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
WARNING
.
.
Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
.
.
When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working con-
dition. If any unit is damaged, dol-
lies must be used.
Always attach safety chains before
towing.
6-12 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ahead position with a rope or
similar device. For models with
a steering wheel lock mechan-
ism, never secure the steering
wheel by pushing the ignition
switch to the LOCK position.
This may damage the steering
lock mechanism.
— Move the selector lever or shift
lever to the N (Neutral) position.
.
.
When towing a CVT model with the
rear wheels on the ground (if you do
not use towing dollies): Always
release the parking brake.
SCE0814
If you have to tow an MT model with
the rear wheels on the ground (if
you do not use towing dollies) or
four wheels on the ground:
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
the transmission. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
raised, always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
¯
NISSAN (except for Krom models)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as
illustrated.
— Place the ignition switch in the
ON position and turn off all
accessories.
.
When towing a CVT model or Man-
ual Transmission (MT) model with
the front wheels on towing dollies:
— Always release the parking
brake.
CAUTION
— Place the ignition switch in the
OFF position (models without
Intelligent Key system) or place
the ignition switch in the ACC or
ON position (models with Intel-
ligent Key system). Secure the
steering wheel in a straight-
.
Never tow Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with
the front wheels on the ground or
four wheels on the ground (forward
or backward), as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to
— Move the transmission shift le-
ver to the N (Neutral) position.
— Observe the following restricted
towing speeds and distances for
manual transmission models
In case of emergency 6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
only:
.
Rear wheels on the ground:
Speed: Below 50 MPH
(80 km/h)
Distance: Less than 50
miles (80 km)
.
Four wheels on the ground:
Speed: Below 60 MPH
(96 km/h)
Distance: Less than 500
miles (800 km)
SCE0861
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
¯
NISSAN (for Krom models)
CAUTION
¯
Do not tow Krom models with any
wheel on the ground, or with the front
or rear wheels raised, because this may
cause damage to the front or rear
bumpers.
NISSAN recommends that you place the vehicle
on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
6-14 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle recovery.
Front:
1
*
1. Remove the hook cover
bumper with a suitable tool.
from the
2
2. Securely install the recovery hook
as
*
illustrated. (The hook is stored under the
floor behind the driver’s seat.)
Make sure that the hook is properly secured in
its original position after use.
SCE0815
SCE0833
Front (except for Kro¯ m models)
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
WARNING
.
.
Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode
and result in serious injury. Parts of
your vehicle could also overheat
and be damaged.
Pulling a stuck vehicle
Do not use the tie down hook for towing or
SCE0830
Front (Kro¯ m models)
In case of emergency 6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
cle tie down hook or recovery hook.
.
.
Always pull the cable straight out
from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull on the vehicle at an angle.
Pulling devices should be routed so
they do not touch any part of the
suspension, steering, brake or cool-
ing systems.
.
Pulling devices such as ropes or
canvas straps are not recommended
for use in vehicle towing or recov-
ery.
SCE0831
SCE0678
Kro¯ m models
Rear
Rocking a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
¯
Krom models: Reinstall the hook cover accord-
ing to the following procedure as illustrated.
Rear:
Do not use the tie down hook to pull the vehicle.
1
1. Fit the left bottom edge of the cover
the opening at an angle.
in
*
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system.
CAUTION
2
2. Slide the cover into position
by aligning
*
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
.
Tow chains or cables must be at-
tached only to the vehicle recovery
hook or main structural members of
the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle
body will be damaged.
A
the area
with the opening.
*
3. Push the cover in while pushing the upper
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
3
*
tab
.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
.
.
Do not use the vehicle tie down
hook to free a vehicle stuck in sand,
snow, mud, etc.
.
Shift back and forth between R (Re-
verse) and D (Drive) (Continuously
Variable Transmission models) or 1st
Never tow a vehicle using the vehi-
6-16 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and R (Reverse) (Manual Transmission
models).
.
.
Apply the accelerator as little as possi-
ble to maintain the rocking motion.
Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D (Continuously
Variable Transmission models) or 1st
and R (Manual Transmission models).
.
Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
6-18 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior................................................ 7-2
Washing ...................................................... 7-2
Waxing ........................................................ 7-3
Removing spots............................................. 7-3
Wheels........................................................ 7-3
Chrome parts................................................ 7-4
Tire dressing................................................. 7-4
Cleaning interior ................................................ 7-5
Air fresheners................................................ 7-5
Floor mats .................................................... 7-5
Seat belts .................................................... 7-6
Corrosion protection ........................................... 7-6
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion...................................................... 7-6
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion...................................................... 7-6
To protect your vehicle from corrosion................. 7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your
vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
CAUTION
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle
as soon as you can:
.
Do not use car washes that use acid
in the detergent. Some car washes,
especially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle compo-
nents, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to func-
tion properly. Always check with
your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
.
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain
.
.
after driving on coastal roads
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface
by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.
when contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs
get on the paint surface
.
when dust or mud builds up on the surface
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
.
.
Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical
detergents, gasoline or solvents.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or while the vehicle body is
hot, as the surface may become
water-spotted.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
.
Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
WASHING
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and
plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly
using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with
clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
7-2 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLASS
proper product.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust
film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass
to become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
.
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied
with the wax.
.
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
CAUTION
Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a
base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
When cleaning the inside of the win-
dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could da-
mage the electrical conductors, radio
antenna elements or rear window
defroster elements.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage
or staining. Special cleaning products are
available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive
accessory stores.
SAI0045
¯
Krom models
CAUTION
WHEELS
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to
maintain their appearance.
Do not use an automatic car wash for
UNDERBODY
¯
Krom models. The rear spoiler and the
wheel coating may be damaged.
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the
underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will
prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the
underbody and suspension. Before the winter
period and again in the spring, the underseal
must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
.
.
.
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing
is recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
reapplying wax.
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
NISSAN recommends that the road wheels
be waxed to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
Appearance and care 7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
wheels. These wheels require special cleaning.
while driving and stain the vehicle paint.
CAUTION
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
CAUTION
Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
.
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an
oil-based tire dressing.
.
The surfaces of the wheels use a
different coating process than typi-
cal aluminum alloy wheels. Do not
use aluminum alloy wheel cleaners
or abrasive cleaners to clean the
wheels. Using such cleaners could
damage the wheel surfaces.
Aluminum alloy wheels
Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a
mild soap solution, especially during winter
months in areas where road salt is used. Salt
could discolor the wheels if not removed.
.
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire tread/
grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
.
.
Do not use an automatic car wash
.
.
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire tread/
grooves.
CAUTION
¯
for Krom models. The wheel coating
may be damaged.
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
Do not use a brush to wash the
.
Do not use a cleaner that uses
strong acid or alkali contents to
clean the wheels.
¯
wheels on Krom models. The wheel
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by tire dressing manufacturer.
coating may be damaged.
CHROME PARTS
.
Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The
wheel temperature should be the
same as ambient temperature.
Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSING
.
Rinse the wheel to completely re-
move the cleaner within 15 minutes
after the cleaner is applied.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the
rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it
may react with the coating and form a com-
pound. This compound may come off the tire
¯
Wheels for Krom models
The wheels on Krom models use a different
coating process than typical aluminum alloy
¯
7-4 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dam-
pened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean
with a dry soft cloth.
FLOOR MATS
and damaging to the leather sur-
faces and should be removed
promptly. Do not use saddle soap,
car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents or am-
monia-based cleaners as they may
damage the leather’s natural finish.
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. No matter what
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for
your vehicle and are properly positioned in
the footwell to prevent interference with
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained
with regular cleaning and replaced if they
become excessively worn.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
.
.
Never use fabric protectors unless
recommended by the manufacturer.
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric
protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Do not use glass or plastic cleaner
on meter or gauge lens covers. It
may damage the lens cover.
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could
affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air
freshener, take the following precautions:
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensors. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and
result in serious personal injury.
.
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they contact
vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air
freshener in a location that allows it to hang
free and not contact an interior surface.
.
Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
CAUTION
.
.
Never use benzine, thinner, or any
similar material.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions before using air fresheners.
Small dirt particles can be abrasive
Appearance and care 7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS
MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI-
BUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap
solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in
the shade before using them.
.
The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint system”
section.
.
Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU-
ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may se-
verely weaken the seat belt webbing.
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the
vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-
sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely
inside the vehicle, and should be removed for
drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.
SAI0042
Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side
only)
This vehicle includes front floor mat brackets to
act as floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your
vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has
grommet holes in it. To install, position the mat
by placing the floor mat bracket hook through
the floor mat grommet hole while centering the
mat in the foot area.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing where
atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt
is used.
Temperature
Periodically check to make certain that the mats
are properly positioned.
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate
of corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.
7-6 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Air pollution
this may damage them.
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will
accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will
also accelerate the disintegration of paint
surfaces.
Chemicals used for road surface deicing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
.
.
.
.
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some areas,
consult a NISSAN dealer.
Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
CAUTION
.
.
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other
debris from the passenger compart-
ment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic
components inside the vehicle as
Appearance and care 7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
7-8 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirement ..................................... 8-2
Scheduled maintenance................................... 8-2
General maintenance ...................................... 8-2
Where to go for service................................... 8-2
Maintenance precautions ..................................... 8-5
Engine compartment check locations ...................... 8-6
MR18DE engine ............................................ 8-6
Engine cooling system......................................... 8-7
Checking engine coolant level........................... 8-8
Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-8
Engine oil......................................................... 8-9
Checking engine oil level ................................. 8-9
Changing engine oil and filter............................ 8-9
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid........ 8-11
Brake and clutch fluid ....................................... 8-11
Window washer fluid ........................................ 8-12
Battery .......................................................... 8-13
Jump starting .............................................. 8-14
Variable voltage control system (if so equipped) ...... 8-15
Drive belt ....................................................... 8-15
Spark plugs .................................................... 8-16
Replacing spark plugs................................... 8-16
Air cleaner...................................................... 8-16
Windshield wiper blades.................................... 8-17
Cleaning .................................................... 8-17
Replacing................................................... 8-18
Self-adjusting brakes .................................... 8-19
Brake pad wear warning ................................ 8-19
Fuses............................................................ 8-20
Engine compartment ..................................... 8-20
Passenger compartment ................................ 8-21
Key battery replacement .................................... 8-22
Keyfob....................................................... 8-22
Intelligent Key.............................................. 8-23
Lights............................................................ 8-25
Headlights.................................................. 8-26
Exterior and interior lights............................... 8-27
Wheels and tires.............................................. 8-28
Tire pressure............................................... 8-28
Tire labeling ................................................ 8-31
Types of tires .............................................. 8-33
Tire chains.................................................. 8-34
Changing wheels and tires ............................. 8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Your new NISSAN has been designed to have
minimum maintenance requirements with long
service intervals to save you both time and
money. However, some day-to-day and regular
maintenance is essential to maintain your
NISSAN’s fine mechanical condition, as well
as its emission and engine performance.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smell, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
Performing general maintenance checks re-
quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few
general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by
yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a
NISSAN dealer.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, see “MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS”
later in this section.
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and serviced by a NISSAN dealer.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper
maintenance care. You are a vital link in the
maintenance chain.
EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE
ITEMS
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
and are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and in-dealership information systems.
They are completely qualified to work on
NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
Additional information on the following
items with “*” is found later in this section.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
For your convenience, both required and op-
tional scheduled maintenance items are de-
scribed and listed in your “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that
guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is
performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to
meet the maintenance requirements on your
vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.
Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors
and the engine hood operate properly. Also
ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate
hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if
necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the primary
latch is released.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal day-
to-day operation. They are essential for proper
vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to
perform these procedures regularly as pre-
scribed.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
For additional information regarding tires, refer
to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War-
ranty Information Booklet.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly
steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely
with the selector lever in the P (Park) position
without applying any brakes.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a
damaged windshield repaired by a qualified
repair facility.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the
parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs
adjusted, see a NISSAN dealer.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks
7,500 miles (12,000 km).
or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt
webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If
necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires,
including the spare, to the pressure specified.
Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive
wear.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when
performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning
the vehicle, etc.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliners, etc. to ensure
they operate smoothly and that all latches lock
securely in every position. Check that the head
restraints/headrests move up and down
smoothly and that the locks (if so equipped)
hold securely in all latched positions.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the pedal
does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep
the floor mat away from the pedal.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to
stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep
the floor mat away from the pedal.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for
wheel alignment.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering conditions, such as excessive free play,
hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that
all warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal
highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and
in sufficient quantity when operating the heater
or air conditioner.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. (See
“PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)
section.
Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
the wipers and washers operate properly and
that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,
oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected
immediately.
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.
It should be between the MAX and MIN lines.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe condition require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Brake and clutch fluid level*: Make sure that
the brake and clutch fluid level is between the
MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-
posed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances, other-
wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
lines and around the exhaust system. At the end
of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly
flushed with plain water, being careful to clean
those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-
late. For additional information, see “CLEANING
EXTERIOR” in the “7. Appearance and care”
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belt*: Make sure that the drive
belt is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface and turning off the
engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to
drain back into the oil pan.
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or mainte-
nance work on your vehicle, always take care
to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or
damage to the vehicle. The following are general
precautions which should be closely observed.
ever you work on your vehicle.
ways conform to local regulations
for disposal of vehicle fluid.
.
.
If you must run the engine in an
enclosed space such as a garage, be
sure there is proper ventilation for
exhaust gases to escape.
.
.
.
Never leave the engine or the CVT
related component harnesses dis-
connected while the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
Never get under the vehicle while it
is supported only by a jack. If it is
necessary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
WARNING
Never connect or disconnect the
battery or any transistorized com-
ponent while the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
.
Park the vehicle on a level surface,
apply the parking brake securely
and block the wheels to prevent
the vehicle from moving. Move the
selector lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion or the shift lever to the N
(Neutral) position.
.
.
Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from fuel tank and the
battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic engine cooling fan. It may
come on at any time without warn-
ing, even if the ignition key is in the
OFF position and the engine is not
running. To avoid injury, always
disconnect the negative battery
cable before working near the fan.
The fuel filter or fuel lines should be
serviced by a NISSAN dealer be-
cause the fuel lines are under high
pressure even when the engine is
off.
.
.
Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when per-
forming any parts replacement or
repairs.
If you must work with the engine
running, keep your hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from moving
fans, belts and any other moving
parts.
This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
CAUTION
.
.
Do not work under the hood while
the engine is hot. Turn the engine
off and wait until it cools down.
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also
available. (See “OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in the “9.
Technical and consumer information” section.)
.
.
It is advisable to secure or remove
any loose clothing and remove any
jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.
before working on your vehicle.
Avoid direct contact with used en-
gine oil and coolant. Improperly
disposed engine oil, and engine
coolant and/or other vehicle fluids
can damage the environment. Al-
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
Always wear eye protection when-
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
difficulties or excessive emissions, and could
affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, we recommend that
it be done by a NISSAN dealer.
SSI0564
6. Engine drive belt location
7. Engine oil dipstick
MR18DE ENGINE*
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Brake and clutch (*1) fluid reservoir
3. Air cleaner
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Radiator filler cap
10. Fuse/fusible link holder
4. Battery
*
Shown with the resonator removed. For removal
instructions, see “ENGINE COMPARTMENT
5. Window washer fluid reservoir
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
CHECK LOCATIONS” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze cool-
ant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains
rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional
cooling system additives are not necessary.
*1: for Manual Transmission (MT) models
WARNING
.
Never remove the radiator or cool-
ant reservoir cap when the engine is
hot. Wait until the engine and
radiator cool down. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure
fluid escaping from the radiator.
See precautions in “IF YOUR VEHI-
CLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case
of emergency” section of this man-
ual.
SDI2394
Removing the resonator
A
Remove the resonator
*
if necessary. Pull the
resonator upward to remove it. Install the
resonator securely after any inspection or
maintenance work is performed.
.
The radiator is equipped with a
pressure type radiator cap. To pre-
vent engine damage, use only a
genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equiva-
lent with the proper mixture ratio of
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized
or distilled water. The use of other
types of coolant solutions may damage
the engine cooling system.
Major cooling system repairs should be per-
formed by a NISSAN dealer. The service
procedures can be found in the appropriate
NISSAN Service Manual.
Outside
temperature
down to
Deminera-
lized water
or distilled
water
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
Anti-freeze
50%
8F
−29.2
8C
−34
50%
WARNING
.
.
To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never change the coolant
when the engine is hot.
SDI2385
Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure
fluid escaping from the radiator.
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
2
the MIN level
, open the reservoir cap and
*
1
add coolant up to the MAX level
. If the
.
.
Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made,
wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
*
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add
1
Keep coolant out of reach of chil-
dren and pets.
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level
.
*
Tighten the cap securely after adding engine
coolant.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OIL
and pour recommended oil through the
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.
3
opening. Do not overfill
.
*
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
.
Place the safety jack stands under the
vehicle jack-up points.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the break-
in period, depending on the severity of
operating conditions.
.
A suitable adapter should be attached to
the jack stand saddle.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and sup-
port points are used to avoid vehicle
damage.
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the
engine, and such damage is not cov-
ered by the warranty.
SDI2386
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
Change the engine oil and filter according to the
maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating
temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
2. Run the engine until it reaches the operating
temperature.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes.
1
level. It should be within the range
. If the
*
2
oil level is below
, remove the oil filler cap
*
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Waste oil must be disposed of
properly.
9. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug
with a wrench.
Check your local regulations.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 to 29 ft-lb
(29 to 39 N·m)
(Perform steps 4 to 8 only when the engine
oil filter change is needed.)
4. Remove the engine under cover under the
oil filter location by removing the bolts and
small plastic clips.
Do not use excessive force.
10. Refill the engine with the recommended oil
through the oil filler opening, and install the
oil filler cap securely.
5. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.
Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section for drain
and refill capacity. The drain and refill
capacity depends on the oil temperature
and drain time. Use these specifications for
reference only. Always use the dipstick to
determine the proper amount of oil in the
engine.
6. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface
with a clean rag.
SDI1978
1. Oil filler cap
2. Oil drain plug
3. Oil filter
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket
material remaining on the mounting
surface of the engine. Failure to do so
could lead to engine damage.
Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.
11. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the drain plug and the oil filter.
Correct as required.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and
completely drain the oil.
12. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary.
8. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight
resistance is felt, then tighten additionally
more than 2/3 turn.
CAUTION
After the operation
1. Install the engine undercover into position as
the following steps.
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the
engine oil is hot.
Oil filter tightening torque:
11 to 15 ft-lb
(14.7 to 20.5 N·m)
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID
When checking or replacement is required, we
recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
For additional brake and clutch fluid information,
see “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
a. Pull the center of the small plastic clips
out.
b. Hold the engine undercover into posi-
tion.
CAUTION
c. Insert the clips through the undercover
into the holes in the frame, then push the
center of the clips in to lock the clips in
place.
.
.
Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.
WARNING
.
Use only new fluid from a sealed
container. Old, inferior or contami-
nated fluid may damage the brake
and clutch systems. The use of
improper fluids can damage the
brake and clutch systems, and affect
the vehicle’s stopping ability.
Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2
will damage the CVT, which is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle
limited warranty.
d. Install the bolts that hold the undercover
in place. Be careful not to strip the bolts
or over-tighten them.
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
.
.
Clean the filler cap before removing.
Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous
and should be stored carefully in
marked containers out of the reach
of children.
WARNING
.
.
Prolonged and repeated contact
with used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made,
wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted
surfaces. This will damage the paint. If
fluid is spilled, immediately wash the
surface with water.
.
Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDOW WASHER FLUID
To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the
cap and pour the window washer fluid into the
reservoir opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for the mixture ratio.
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodi-
cally.
Type A
Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning
light illuminates.
SDI2387
SDI2388
Type B
Type A
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is
To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug
1
below the MIN line
or the brake warning
*
1
the center hole
of the cap/tube assembly,
*
light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super
then remove it from the reservoir. If there is no
fluid in the tube, add fluid.
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
2
fluid up to the MAX line
. If fluid must be
*
added frequently, the system should be checked
by a NISSAN dealer.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
window washer fluid.
Recommended fluid:
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concen-
trate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
SDI2429
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type B
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
BATTERY
.
Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
.
.
When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.
CAUTION
.
.
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for window washer solution.
This may result in damage to the
paint.
.
.
Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative 7 battery
terminal cable to prevent discharging it.
Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
window washer reservoir tank.
.
Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.
WARNING
.
Do not expose the battery to flames
or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas
generated by the battery is explo-
sive. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or
painted surfaces. After touching a
battery or battery cap, do not touch
or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash
your hands. If the acid contacts your
eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15
minutes and seek medical attention.
.
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
recommended levels before pouring
the fluid into the window washer
reservoir tank. Do not use the
window washer reservoir tank to
mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
.
Do not operate the vehicle if the
fluid in the battery is low. Low
battery fluid can cause a higher load
on the battery which can generate
heat, reduce battery life, and in
some cases lead to an explosion.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “JUMP
STARTING” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
DI0137MA
SDI1480C
A
Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be
1. Remove the cell plugs
.
*
1
*
between the UPPER LEVEL
and LOWER
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL
2
LEVEL
lines.
*
1
*
line.
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level to the indicator in each
filler opening. Do not overfill.
If the side of the battery is not clear, check
the distilled water level by looking directly
above the cell; the condition
1
*
indicates
2
OK and the condition
added.
needs more to be
*
A
3. Tighten cell plugs
*
.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
DRIVE BELT
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
2. Have the belt condition checked regularly.
.
.
Do not ground accessories directly
to the battery terminal. Doing so will
bypass the variable voltage control
system and the vehicle battery may
not charge completely.
Use electrical accessories with the
engine running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
The variable voltage control system measures
the amount of electrical discharge from the
battery and controls voltage generated by the
generator.
SDI2422
1. Drive belt auto-tensioner
2. Crankshaft pulley
3. Air conditioner compressor
4. Water pump
5. Alternator
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position before servicing drive
belts. The engine could rotate unex-
pectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
in poor condition or loose, have it replaced
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPARK PLUGS
AIR CLEANER
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to
remove the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
SDI2020
SDI2106
1
To remove the air cleaner filter, push the tabs
*
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
2
*
and pull the filter upward
.
If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer
for servicing.
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-
nance Guide”. When replacing the filter, wipe
the inside of the air cleaner housing and the
cover with a damp cloth.
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped
spark plugs as frequently as the conventional
type spark plugs since they will last much longer.
Follow the maintenance log shown in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do
not reuse the iridium-tipped spark plugs by
cleaning or regapping.
WARNING
.
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops
Always replace spark plugs with recom-
mended or equivalent ones.
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there, and the engine backfires,
you could be burned. Do not drive
with the air cleaner removed, and be
careful when working on the engine
with the air cleaner removed.
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
.
Never pour fuel into the throttle
body or attempt to start the engine
with the air cleaner removed. Doing
so could result in serious injury.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent.
Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your
windshield is still not clear after cleaning the
blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SDI1803
REPLACING
CAUTION
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
.
.
After wiper blade replacement, re-
turn the wiper arm to its original
position; otherwise it may be da-
maged when the hood is opened.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
A
2. Push and hold the release tab
, and
*
move the wiper blade down the wiper arm
1
*
.
SDI1865
Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arm may be
damaged from wind pressure.
3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
A
*
Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle
.
arm until a click sounds.
This may cause improper windshield washer
operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any
4. Rotate the wiper blade so that the dimple is
in the groove.
B
objects with a needle or small pin
careful not to damage the nozzle.
. Be
*
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE
BRAKES
Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or
replacement is required.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
affect the function or performance of the brake
system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information, see the
maintenance log section of your “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”.
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the
brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake
system check if the brake pedal height
does not return to normal.
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING
The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-
ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will
first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,
the sound will always be heard even if the brake
pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear warning
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise
may be heard. Occasional brake noise during
light to moderate stops is normal and does not
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUSES
3. Remove the resonator. (See “ENGINE
COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS”
earlier in this section.)
4. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover by
1
pushing the tab
and lifting the cover
*
2
from the right side
, then the left side
*
3
.
*
5. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
6. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller
located in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
SDI1753
SDI1959
A
*
7. If the fuse is open
, replace it with a new
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
B
fuse
.
*
8. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or cause a fire.
4
*
The holder
also contains the fuses. For
checking and/or replacing, see a NISSAN
dealer.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are turned off.
2. Open the engine hood.
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SDI1869
SDI2389
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and
the fuses are in good condition, check the
fusible links in the holders
any of these fusible links are melted, replace only
with genuine NISSAN parts.
2
*
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
1
2
3
,
and
. If
* *
*
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or cause a fire.
For checking and replacing the fusible links in
2
*
3
*
the holders
and
, see a NISSAN dealer.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are turned off.
1
*
2. Pull to remove the fuse box cover
.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to
swallow the battery and removed parts.
SDI1753
A
*
4. If the fuse is open
, replace it with a new
B
fuse
.
*
5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
SDI2134
KEYFOB
Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:
1. Remove the screw.
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the
corner and twist it to separate the upper part
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect
the casing.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery:
CR1620 or equivalent
.
.
.
Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the case.
4. Close the lid securely and install the screw.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance
for replacement.
FCC Notice:
SDI2451
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
INTELLIGENT KEY
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
follows:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-
da.
1. Remove the mechanical key from the In-
telligent Key.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the
corner and twist it to separate the upper part
from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect
the casing.
and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accor-
dance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communica-
tions. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the inter-
ference by one or more of the following
measures:
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery:
CR2025 or equivalent
.
.
.
Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
—
—
—
Reorient or relocate the receiving an-
tenna.
SDI2452
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts
Increase the separation between the
equipment and the receiver.
Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the case.
1
2
*
, and then push them together
until it
*
is securely closed.
Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance
for replacement.
—
Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device pursuant to part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential in-
stallation. This equipment generates, uses
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHTS
1. Front turn signal light
2. Headlight (high-beam/low-beam)
3. Front side marker/park light
4. Map light (if so equipped)
5. Ceiling light
6. Front fog light (if so equipped)
7. Side turn signal light
8. High-mounted stop light
9. License plate light
10. Rear combination light (stop/tail/turn signal/back-
up light)
11. Cargo light (if so equipped)
12. Rear side marker light
SDI2497
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEADLIGHTS
.
Aiming is not necessary after repla-
cing the bulb. When aiming adjust-
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is
not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
ment is necessary, contact
NISSAN dealer.
a
Use the same number and wattage as originally
installed as shown in the chart.
Replacing
Halogen headlight model:
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb.
CAUTION
.
Do not leave the bulb out of the
headlight reflector for a long period
of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
entering the headlight body may
affect bulb performance.
.
.
High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb
may break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
SDI2396
Disconnect the battery negative cable before
replacing bulbs.
Only touch the base when handling
the bulb. Never touch the glass
envelope. Touching the glass envel-
ope could significantly affect bulb
life and/or headlight performance.
A
1. Remove the connector
and the back
*
B
*
cover
.
C
*
2. Unlock the retaining spring
, and then
remove the bulb.
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Wattage (W)
Bulb No.
HB2
Headlight high/low beams (Halogen)
Front turn signal light*
60/55
21
35
5
PY21W
H8
Front fog light (if so equipped)*
Front side marker/park light*
W5W
WY5W
Side turn signal light*
Rear combination light*
5
turn signal
stop/tail
21
21/5
18
5
PY21W
W21/5W
W16W
W5W
W5W
—
back-up
Rear side marker light*
License plate light*
5
Map light (if so equipped)
High-mounted stop light*
Ceiling light
5
18
8
W16W
—
Cargo light (if so equipped)
8
—
*: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.
SDI2306
:
:
REMOVE
INSTALL
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D or E.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens
and/or cover.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “FLAT TIRE” in
the “6. In case of emergency” section.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).
Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop
in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
SDI2391
SDI2392
Map light
Cargo light
For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning
light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section, “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure of the tires (including
the spare) often and always prior to long
distance trips. The recommended tire
pressure specifications are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label under
the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
SDI1845
Ceiling light
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and Loading Information label is affixed to
the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures
should be checked regularly because:
not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating condi-
tions due to premature tire fail-
ure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Load-
ing beyond the specified capa-
city may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
.
.
Most tires naturally lose air over time.
Tires can lose air suddenly when driven
over potholes or other objects or if the
vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
.
.
Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect tire
life and vehicle handling.
For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
WARNING
.
.
Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
The Gross Vehicle Weight rating
(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.
S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-
bel. The vehicle weight capacity
is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
4
* Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The
recommended cold tire inflation is set
by the manufacturer to provide the
best balance of tire wear, vehicle
handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
5
* Tire size — see “TIRE LABELING”
later in this section.
6
* Spare tire size or compact spare tire
size (if so equipped)
SDI2503
Tire and Loading Information label
2
* Vehicle load limit: See “VEHICLE
LOADING INFORMATION” in the “9.
Technical and consumer information”
section.
1
* Seating capacity: The maximum num-
ber of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
3
* Original size: The size of the tires
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tion shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of the
valve stem briefly with the tip of the
gauge stem to release pressure. Re-
check the pressure and add or release
air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
SDI1949
SDI1575
COLD TIRE
Example
SIZE
INFLATION
PRESSURE
Checking the tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the side-
wall of all tires. This information identifies
and describes the fundamental character-
istics of the tire and also provides the tire
identification number (TIN) for safety stan-
dard certification. The TIN can be used to
identify the tire in case of a recall.
P195/60R15 230 kPa,
FRONT
ORIGINAL
TIRE
87H
P195/55R16 230 kPa,
86V 33 PSI
P195/60R15 230 kPa,
33 PSI
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto
the valve stem. Do not press too hard or
force the valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard while
checking the pressure, reposition the
gauge to eliminate this leakage.
REAR
ORIGINAL
TIRE
87H
33 PSI
P195/55R16 230 kPa,
86V
33 PSI
3. Remove the gauge.
SPARE
TIRE
420 kPa,
60 PSI
T125/70D15
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare it to the specifica-
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Two-digit number (16): This number is
the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight each
tire can support. You may not find this
information on all tires because it is not
required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
SDI1606
SDI1607
Example
Example
1
2
* Tire size (example: P215/60R16
* TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
94H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed
for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires
have this information.)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department
of Transportation”. The symbol can be
placed above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification Number.
2. Three-digit number (215): This number
gives the width in millimeters of the tire
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifi-
cation mark
3. Two-digit number (60): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-
tional)
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TYPES OF TIRES
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
6. Four numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 3103 means the 31st week of
2003. If these numbers are missing,
then look on the other sidewall of the
tire.
WARNING
6
* Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
.
When changing or replacing tires,
be sure all four tires are of the same
type (Example: Summer, All Season
Indicates whether the tire requires an
inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
or Snow) and construction.
A
7
* The word “radial”
NISSAN dealer may be able to help
you with information about tire type,
size, speed rating and availability.
3
* Tire ply composition and material
The word “radial” is shown, if the tire
has radial structure.
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
.
Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
8
* Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
4
* Maximum permissible inflation pres-
Other tire-related terminology:
sure
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model
name molding that is higher or deeper than
the same molding on the other sidewall of
the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
For additional information regard-
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire
Safety Information” (Canada) in the
Warranty Information Booklet.
5
* Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the
tire.
your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re-
commended by the tire chain manufacturer to
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire
chain must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage to the
fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully
loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In
addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,
your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle
handling and performance may be adversely
affected.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies all season tires on some
models to provide good performance all year,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All
Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON
and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction
than All Season tires and may be more appro-
priate in some areas.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before
installing studded tires. Skid and traction cap-
abilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry
surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-
studded snow tires.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on dry
roads. Summer tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire
sidewall.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according
to location. Check the local laws before instal-
ling tire chains. When installing tire chains, make
sure they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are
designed to meet the SAE standard minimum
clearances between the tire and the closest
vehicle suspension or body component required
to accommodate the use of a winter traction
device (tire chains or cables). The minimum
clearances are determined using the factory
equipped tire size. Other types may damage
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
tire chains in such conditions can cause damage
to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or
icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires will have lower speed
ratings than factory equipped tires and may not
match the potential maximum vehicle speed.
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-
tened to the specification at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to the specification at each
tire rotation interval.
WARNING
.
.
After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
SDI1662
SDI1663
Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
1. Wear indicator
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
2. Wear indicator location mark
Tire wear and damage
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). (See “FLAT
TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section for tire replacing procedures.)
.
.
Do not include the spare tire or
any other small size spare tire in
the tire rotation.
WARNING
For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
.
Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking, bul-
ging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
.
The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
WARNING
.
Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician, because
some tire damage may not be
obvious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire failure
and possible personal injury.
.
The use of tires other than those
recommended or the mixed use of
tires of different brands, construc-
tion (bias, bias-belted or radial), or
tread patterns can adversely affect
the ride, braking, handling, ground
clearance, body-to-tire clearance,
tire chain clearance, speedometer
calibration, headlight aim and bum-
per height. Some of these effects
may lead to accidents and could
result in serious personal injury.
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
.
.
Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious perso-
nal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, contact a
NISSAN dealer.
Do not install a damaged or de-
formed wheel or tire even if it has
been repaired. Such wheels or tires
could have structural damage and
could fail without warning.
.
If the wheels are changed for any
reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimen-
sion. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear,
degrade vehicle handling character-
istics and/or interference with the
brake discs/drums. Such interfer-
ence can lead to decreased braking
efficiency and/or early brake pad/
shoe wear. See “WHEELS AND
TIRES” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section of
this manual for wheel off-set dimen-
sions.
For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
.
.
The use of retread tire is not re-
commended.
For additional information regard-
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire
Safety Information” (Canada) in the
Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. (See “SPECIFICA-
TIONS” in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section for recommended types
and sizes of tires and wheels.)
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel balance
.
Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.
WARNING
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can
get out of balance. Therefore, they should be
balanced as required.
.
The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire should be used for emergency
use. It should be replaced with the
standard tire at the first opportunity
to avoid possible tire or differential
damage.
.
.
Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
Do not use more than one spare tire
at the same time.
.
.
Drive carefully while the TEMPOR-
ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-
stalled. Avoid sharp turns and
abrupt braking while driving.
For additional information regarding tires, refer
to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War-
ranty Information Booklet.
CAUTION
Periodically check spare tire infla-
tion pressure. Always keep the
pressure of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa,
4.2 bar).
.
.
Do not use tire chains on a TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire
chains will not fit properly and may
cause damage to the vehicle.
Care of wheels
See “CLEANING EXTERIOR” in the “7. Ap-
pearance and care” section for details about
care of the wheels.
Because the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire is smaller than the
original tire, ground clearance is
reduced. To avoid damage to the
vehicle, do not drive over obstacles.
Also do not drive the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
since it may get caught.
.
.
With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire installed do not drive your
vehicle at speeds faster than 50
MPH (80 km/h).
Spare tire
When a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY
USE ONLY), the TPMS will not function.
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used,
otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident.
When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on
the rear wheels and original tire
used on the front wheels (drive
wheels). Use tire chains only on
the front (original) tires.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 Technical and consumer information
¯
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ............ 9-2
Fuel recommendation ...................................... 9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation............... 9-5
Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant
Engine......................................................... 9-7
Wheels and tires............................................ 9-7
Dimensions and weights .................................. 9-8
For Krom models ......................................... 9-13
Vehicle loading information ................................. 9-14
Terms........................................................ 9-14
Vehicle load capacity .................................... 9-15
Measurement of weights ................................ 9-18
Towing a trailer................................................ 9-18
Flat towing ..................................................... 9-18
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT).......... 9-19
Manual Transmission..................................... 9-19
Uniform tire quality grading................................. 9-19
Treadwear .................................................. 9-19
Traction AA, A, B and C ................................ 9-19
Temperature A, B and C................................ 9-19
Emission control system warranty......................... 9-20
Reporting safety defects (US only) ....................... 9-20
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test...... 9-21
Event Data Recorders (EDR) .............................. 9-22
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information ... 9-22
In the event of a collision ............................... 9-22
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country.................................................. 9-8
Vehicle identification ........................................... 9-8
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate ............. 9-8
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)...... 9-9
Engine serial number ...................................... 9-9
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ............... 9-9
Emission control information label .................... 9-10
Tire and loading information label..................... 9-10
Air conditioner specification label
(if so equipped) ........................................... 9-10
Installing front license plate ................................ 9-11
¯
Except for Krom models................................. 9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate)
Imp measure
Recommended specifications
US measure
13-1/4 gal
Liter
50
Fuel
11 gal
See “FUEL RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
With oil filter change
4-3/8 qt
4 qt
3-5/8 qt
3-3/8 qt
4.1
3.8
.
.
Engine oil with API Certification Mark*2
Viscosity SAE 5W-30
Without oil filter change
Cooling system
CVT model
MT model
7-1/2 qt
7-1/4 qt
6-1/4 qt
6 qt
7.1
6.8
With reservoir
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
50% Demineralized or distilled water
Reservoir
3/4 qt
—
5/8 qt
—
0.7
—
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid
Manual Transmission (MT) gear oil
Brake and clutch fluid
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2*3
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN gear oil (Chevron Texaco ETL8997B) 75W-80 or equivalent*4
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
—
—
—
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system lubricants
Window washer fluid
HFC-134a (R-134a)*6
—
—
—
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R or exact equivalent
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
1-1/4 gal
1 gal
4.5
*1: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.
*2: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.
*3: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
*4: If Genuine NISSAN gear oil is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. Replace with Genuine NISSAN gear oil as soon as it is available.
*5: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.
*6: For additional information, see “VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.
9-2 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and vehicle performance. Ask your service
station manager if the gasoline meets the
WWFC specifications.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
number (Research octane number 91).
.
If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not
available to ensure that all methanol
blends are suitable for use in NISSAN
vehicles.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor-
mulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
CAUTION
.
.
.
Using a fuel other than that speci-
fied could adversely affect the emis-
sion control system, and may also
affect warranty coverage.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because
this will damage the three-way cat-
alyst.
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-
nol with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels
of which the oxygenate content and the fuel
compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily
determined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced
after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can
damage the fuel system compo-
nents and is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
Take care not to spill gasoline during
refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.
Gasoline specifications
.
The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
E-85 fuel
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) speci-
fications where it is available. Many of the
automobile manufacturers developed this spe-
cification to improve emission control system
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern-
ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
.
If an oxygenate-blend, other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
Technical and consumer information 9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
pumps to be identified by a small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
damage. If any of the above symptoms are
encountered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel
injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve
deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commer-
cially. Many of these additives intended for gum,
varnish or deposit removal may contain active
solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful
to the fuel system and engine.
CAUTION
.
Your vehicle is not designed to run
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a
vehicle not specifically designed for
E-85 fuel can damage fuel system
components and is not covered by
the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock”. (Spark
knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If
severe, this can lead to engine damage. If
you detect a persistent heavy spark knock
even when using gasoline of the stated
octane rating, or if you hear steady spark
knock while holding a steady speed on
level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct
the condition. Failure to correct the condi-
tion is misuse of the vehicle, for which
NISSAN is not responsible.
.
.
E-85 is a mixture of approximately
85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
gasoline.
U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be
identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate per-
centage for that region.
Incorrect ignition timing will result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
9-4 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be
operated before the next oil change. Choosing
an oil viscosity other than that recommended
could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals”.
STI0505
1. API certification mark
2. API service symbol
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API
certification mark on the front of the container.
Oils which do not have the specified quality
label should not be used as they could cause
engine damage.
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using an engine oil and
filter other than the specified quality, or exceed-
ing recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of
incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE-
COMMENDATION
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance, see
“CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/
LUBRICANTS” earlier in this section. NISSAN
recommends the use of an energy conserving oil
in order to improve fuel economy.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used and
maintenance intervals are followed.
Your engine was filled with a high quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has
been previously used should not be used.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
Technical and consumer information 9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
upon how you use your vehicle.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect
the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental
regulations require the recovery and recycling of
any refrigerant during automotive air condition-
ing system service. A NISSAN dealer has the
trained technicians and equipment needed to
recover and recycle your air conditioning system
refrigerant.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes.
.
repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
.
.
.
driving in dusty conditions
extensive idling
stop and go commuting
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your
air conditioning system.
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE-
FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE-
COMMENDATIONS
The air conditioning system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil,
NISSAN A/C system oil Type R or the exact
equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air
conditioning system and will require
the replacement of all air conditioner
system components.
9-6 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
WHEELS AND TIRES
Road wheel
ENGINE
Model
MR18DE
Type
Size
Offset in (mm)
1.65 (42)
Type
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder, in-line
3.307 6 3.193 (84.0 6 81.1)
109.65 (1,798)
Cylinder arrangement
Bore 6 Stroke
Displacement
Firing order
Steel
15 6 6J
16 6 6J
15 6 4T
in (mm)
cu in (cm3)
Aluminum
T-type
1.65 (42)
1.38 (35)
1-3-4-2
Tire
Idle speed
rpm
No adjustment is necessary.
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)
Spark plug
degree/rpm
Standard
in (mm)
Pressure PSI
(kPa) [Cold]
Type
Size
FXE20HR-11
0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
P195/60R15
87H
Spark plug gap (Normal)
Camshaft operation
Conventional
T-type
33 (230)
60 (420)
P195/55R16
86V
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
T125/70D15
Technical and consumer information 9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEN TRAVELING OR
REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN
ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
When planning to travel in another coun-
try, you should first find out if the fuel available is
suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length
in (mm)
156.7 (3,980)*1
156.5 (3,975)*2
157.8 (4,010)*1, *3
157.5 (4,000)*2, *3
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline.
Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas
where appropriate fuel is not available.
Overall width
Overall height
in (mm) 66.7 (1,695)
in (mm)
66.1 (1,680)
65.0 (1,650)*3
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
Front tread
in (mm) 58.1 (1,475)
in (mm) 58.3 (1,480)
Rear tread
Wheelbase
in (mm)
99.6 (2,530)
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
(GVWR)
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards vary
according to the country, state, province or
district; therefore, vehicle specifications may
differ.
lb (kg)
STI0457
See the F.M.V.S.S. or
C.M.V.S.S. certification
label on the driver’s
side center pillar.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
Gross Axle
Weight Rating
(GAWR)
The vehicle identification number plate is at-
tached as shown. This number is the identifica-
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.
When any vehicle is to be taken into
another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transpor-
tation, and registration are the responsi-
bility of the user. NISSAN is not
responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.
Front
Rear
lb (kg)
lb (kg)
*1: With front license plate bracket
*2: Without front license plate bracket
¯
*3: Krom model
9-8 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STI0637
STI0466
STI0448
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification
label is affixed as shown. This label contains
valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross
Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
Remove the cover to access the number.
Technical and consumer information 9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STI0638
STI0494
STI0639
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
LABEL
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL (if so equipped)
The emission control information label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as
shown.
The air conditioner specification label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
9-10 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
¯
EXCEPT FOR Krom MODELS
Use the following steps to mount the license
plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that
the following parts are enclosed in the plastic
bag.
.
.
.
.
License plate bracket
J-nut 6 2
Screw 6 2
Screw grommet 6 2
1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.
A
2. Locate the center position
on the lower
*
part of the air duct. Measure straight down
from the edge where the bumper and air
B
duct meet to the aligning holes
, keeping
*
the tape measure lined up with the center
position.
B
*
3. Mark the holes
with a felt-tip pen.
B
4. Carefully drill the two aligning holes
*
using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the
marked locations. (Be sure that the drill
only goes through the bumper fascia.)
C
5. Line up the bosses
or license plate
*
bracket with the holes and hold the license
plate bracket in place.
STI0647
Technical and consumer information 9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D
*
6. Mark the center of the holes
tip pen.
with a felt-
7. Carefully drill the two pilot holes using a
0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked
locations. (Be sure that the drill only
goes through the bumper fascia.)
8. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.
9. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the
grommet hole to add a 908 turn onto the
E
*
part
.
10. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket
before placing the license plate bracket on
the fascia.
11. Install the license plate bracket with the
screws.
12. Install the license plate with bolts that are
not longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).
9-12 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
¯
FOR Krom MODELS
Use the following steps to mount the license
plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that
the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag.
.
.
.
.
License plate bracket
J-nut 6 2
Screw 6 4
Screw grommet 6 4
1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.
2. Temporarily place the license plate bracket
A
while aligning points
of the front bumper
in the license plate
*
B
fascia with holes
bracket.
*
A
B
3. Confirm that points
and
are aligned.
*
*
Hold the license plate bracket and mark the
C
points
on the bumper facia through the
*
D
center of the holes
with a felt-tip pen.
*
4. Remove the license plate bracket.
A
5. Carefully drill two shallow pilot holes
*
C
and
using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at
*
the marked locations. (Be sure that the
drill only goes through the fascia, or
damage to the nut may occur.)
STI0648
6. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.
Technical and consumer information 9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
7. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the
.
.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
- maximum total combined weight of the
unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other
optional equipment. This information is
located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
label.
grommet hole to add a 908 turn onto the
WARNING
E
*
part
.
.
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside the vehi-
cle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
8. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket
before placing the license plate bracket on
the fascia.
9. Install the license plate bracket with the
screws.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This informa-
tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.
S.S. label.
.
.
Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
10. Install the license plate with bolts that are
not longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).
Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
.
.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rat-
ing) - The maximum total weight rating
of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and
trailer.
TERMS
Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle.
This is the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is
used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue
weight must be included as part of the
cargo load. This information is located
on the Tire and Loading Information
label.
It is important to familiarize yourself with the
following terms before loading your vehicle:
.
Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment,
fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo.
.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
9-14 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Cargo capacity - permissible weight of
cargo, the subtracted weight of occu-
pants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle
shown as “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading
Information label. Do not exceed the
number of occupants shown as “Seating
Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants
and cargo”, add the weight of all occu-
pants, then add the total luggage weight.
Examples are shown in the following
illustration.
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the XXX
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or
(640 − 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
(See “MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS”
later in this section.)
STI0447
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. See the Tire and Loading Information
label.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
your vehicle’s placard.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a sudden stop or collision, unse-
cured cargo could cause personal
injury.
WARNING
.
.
Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
.
.
The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
items in the cargo area. Secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control
and cause personal injury.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum
front and rear GAWRs. If you do,
parts of your vehicle can break, tire
damage could occur, or it can
change the way your vehicle han-
dles. This could result in loss of
control and cause personal injury.
SIC4141
SECURING THE LOAD
There are tie down hooks located in the cargo
area as shown. The tie down hooks can be used
to secure cargo with ropes or other types of
straps.
.
Overloading not only can short-
en the life of your vehicle and
the tire, but can cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer
braking distances. This may
cause a premature tire failure,
which could result in a serious
accident and personal injury.
Failures caused by overloading
are not covered by the vehicle’s
LOADING TIPS
Do not apply a total load of more than 7 lb
.
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./
C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
A
(3 kg) to a single hook
or 22 lb (10 kg)
*
B
to a single hook
when securing cargo.
*
WARNING
.
Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from
sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
Technical and consumer information 9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING A TRAILER
FLAT TOWING
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a
vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a
motor home.
warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts
that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not exceed
either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR). The total of the axle loads should
not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given
on the vehicle certification label. If weight
ratings are exceeded, move or remove
items to bring all weights below the ratings.
CAUTION
.
.
.
Failure to follow these guidelines
can result in severe transmission
damage.
Whenever flat towing your vehicle,
always tow forward, never back-
ward.
DO NOT tow any Continuously Vari-
able Transmission (CVT) vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground
(flat towing). Doing so WILL DA-
MAGE internal transmission parts
due to lack of transmission lubrica-
tion.
.
For emergency towing procedures
refer to “TOWING YOUR VEHICLE”
in the “6. In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
9-18 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-
MISSION (CVT)
WARNING
To tow a vehicle equipped with a Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT), an appropriate
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed
vehicle’s driving wheels. Always follow the dolly
manufacturer’s recommendations when using
their product.
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
TEMPERATURE A, B AND C
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
TREADWEAR
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and
C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
.
Always tow with the manual transmission in
Neutral.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road char-
acteristics and climate.
.
Your vehicle speed should never exceed 70
MPH (112 km/h) when flat towing your
vehicle.
.
After towing 500 miles, start and idle the
engine with the transmission in Neutral for
two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after
every 500 miles of towing may cause
damage to the transmission’s internal parts.
TRACTION AA, A, B AND C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
Technical and consumer information 9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US
only)
Your NISSAN is covered by the following
emission warranties.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying NISSAN.
loading, either separately or in combi-
nation, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.
For US:
.
.
Emission Defects Warranty
Emissions Performance Warranty
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
Details of these warranties may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-
formation Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty
Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
.
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Ad-
ministrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.
gov.
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada:
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN. If you
did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet,
or it has become lost, you may obtain a
replacement by writing to:
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261).
.
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario,
L4W 4Z5
9-20 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
Due to legal requirements in some states/areas
or provinces, your vehicle may be required to be
in what is called the “ready condition” for an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis-
sion control system.
Continuously Variable Transmission models)
or the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position
(for Manual Transmission models).
WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner according to traffic
conditions and obey all traffic laws.
9. Turn the engine off.
10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more
time.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when
it is driven through certain driving patterns.
Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained
by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle
until the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle points between the C and H (normal
operating temperature).
If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is
acceptable between steps. Do not stop the
engine until step 7 is completed.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking
the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/
maintenance test readiness condition. Place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and
then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
“ready”.
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator
pedal completely and keep it released for at
least 10 seconds.
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a
moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of
53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 9
minutes.
4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running.
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)
and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.
If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready”
condition, drive the vehicle through the following
pattern to set the vehicle to the “ready condi-
tion”. If you cannot or do not want to perform the
driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it
for you.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)
and maintain the speed for at least 3
minutes.
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission
selector lever in the P (Park) position (for
Technical and consumer information 9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the
factory trained technicians working at a NISSAN
dealer. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can
also be purchased.
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will
only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.
In the USA:
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals contact:
.
.
.
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals contact:
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
1-800-247-5321
In Canada:
.
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Sounds are not recorded.
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this
model year and prior please contact a NISSAN
dealer. For the phone number and location of a
NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN
Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a
bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g. name,
gender, age and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this
unlikely event, there is some important informa-
9-22 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tion you should know.
Why should you take a chance?
In over 40 states, the law says you must be
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
your vehicle. And some states have enacted
laws that restrict insurance companies from
authorizing the use of non-genuine collision
parts during the new vehicle warranty. These
laws help protect you, so you can take action to
protect yourself.
Many insurance companies routinely authorize
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to
cut costs, among other reasons.
Insist on the use of Genuine NISSAN
Collision Parts!
If you want your vehicle to be restored using
parts made to NISSAN’s original exacting
specifications — if you want to help it to last
and hold its resale value, the solution is simple.
Tell your insurance agent and your repair
shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Colli-
sion Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-
NISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN’s warranty
apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part.
It’s your right!
If you should need further information visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect
your personal safety, preserve your warranty
protection and maintain the resale value of your
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit
unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at
the end of your lease.
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones
to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate
the windshield of your vehicle in an accident.
Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide
such built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine
parts often show premature wear, rust and
corrosion.
Technical and consumer information 9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
9-24 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Index
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Steering wheel audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Autolight system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Automatic
Air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Average fuel consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
A
C
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Advanced air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Air bag system
Cabin air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . 9-2
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Ceiling light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Installation using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Chimes, Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Circuit breaker, Fusible link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-5
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Advanced air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Front passenger air bag and status light . . . . 1-51
Front-seat mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
B
Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57, 2-14
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Air conditioner
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Battery replacement, Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Battery replacement, Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Battery saver system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Brightness control, Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Air conditioner service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12, 9-6
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Alarm, How to stop alarm
(see vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Alcohol, drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light . . . 2-10
Appearance care
Exterior appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Interior appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Command
(See Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System) . . . 4-50
Compact Disc (CD) player
(See audio system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26, 4-31, 4-37
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Controls, Steering wheel audio controls . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coolant
Capacities and recommended fuel/
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . 9-2
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Coolant temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Front manual seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Front passenger air bag and status light . . . . . . . . 1-51
Front seat, Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Front-seat active head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Fuel
CVT, Driving with CVT
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . . . . . 5-7, 5-14
D
Daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Defroster switch, Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Door open warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Driving
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Fuel octane rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Fuel-filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Fuel-filler door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
F
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Driving with CVT
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . 5-7, 5-14
Driving with manual transmission . . . . . . . . 5-8, 5-18
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . 5-2
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Filter
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . 2-27
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Floor mat cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Fluid
G
E
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Economy, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Electric power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Electric power steering warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Engine
Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
P position selecting warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Remote keyless operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Interior light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
iPod® connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
iPod® player operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
ISOFIX child restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Ceiling light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Headlights bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
H
Hands-Free Phone System, Bluetooth®. . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Headlights
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Heater
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Heater and air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Hook
Luggage hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Utility hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
K
Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement ... 8-27
Loading information
(See vehicle loading information). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Lock
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Back door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Keyless entry
(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
I
Ignition switch
L
(with Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
(without Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Intelligent Key system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Labels
Low tire pressure warning system (See tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . 9-9
Tire and Loading information label . . . . 8-30, 9-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
LATCH system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
License plate, Installing front license plate. . . . . . . 9-11
M
Maintenance
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2, 8-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Malfunction indicator light (MIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Meter
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Mirror
Overdrive OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Overheat, If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Steering wheel audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Rapid air pressure loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
P
Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . 3-6
Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Rearview monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Recorders, Event data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Registering your vehicle in another country. . . . . . . . 9-8
Remote keyless entry function, For Intelligent
Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 3-18
Parking
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Phone
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System . . . . . . 4-44
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Power
Electric power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Power door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Precautions
Audio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Braking precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
When starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9, 5-10
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Monitor, Rearview monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Reporting safety defects (US only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
N
New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
S
O
Safety
Child seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Reporting safety defects (US only). . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Satellite radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Seat belt(s)
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Oil
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Outside air temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
R
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Seat belt hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Seat belts with pretensioners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Shoulder belt height adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Three-point type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Seat(s), Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Security system, Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . 2-17
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Status light, Front passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Steering
Electric power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Steering wheel switch for audio controls . . . . 4-41
Tilting steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Supplemental air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . 1-57, 2-14
Supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
Engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tilt steering column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Tires
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Low tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Tire and Loading information label . . . . 8-30, 9-10
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tire dressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 6-2
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Switch
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Top
Security system
(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
Engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Audio control steering wheel switch . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Overdrive OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch ... 2-28
Selector lever
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Shift lock release
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Shifting
Tether strap child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Towing
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Towing a trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
TPMS, Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Transmission
CVT
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . 5-7, 5-14
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8, 5-18
Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37, 9-7
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Starting
T
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Temperature gauge, Engine coolant
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Driving with CVT
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . 5-7, 5-14
temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Driving with manual transmission . . . . . . . . 5-8, 5-18
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission selector lever lock release . . . . . 5-17
Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system). . . . 3-6
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 6-2
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . 2-20
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Transmitter, With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Warning labels, Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Warning light
Traveling or registering your vehicle in another
country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57, 2-14
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Door open warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Electric power steering warning light . . . . . . . . 2-12
Intelligent Key system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Warranty, Emission control system warranty. . . . . 9-20
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . 2-22
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . 2-20
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Care of wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Window(s)
U
Underbody cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
V
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Vehicle
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Identification number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Loading information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . .. 2-28
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . . . . 5-28
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Voice command
(See Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System) . .. 4-50
W
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Wiper
Warning
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . 2-22
Rear window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
.
.
Engine oil with API Certification Mark
Viscosity SAE 5W-30
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
number (Research octane number 91).
See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section for engine oil and
oil filter recommendation.
CAUTION
.
Using a fuel other than that speci-
fied could adversely affect the emis-
sion control systems, and may also
affect warranty coverage.
COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
additional information, see “WHEELS AND
TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.
.
.
Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, since this
will damage the three way catalyst.
Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can
damage the fuel system compo-
nents and is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-
DURES RECOMMENDATION:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the recommendations out-
lined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section of this Owner’s
Manual. Follow these recommendations for the
future reliability and economy of your new
vehicle.
For additional information, see “CAPACITIES
AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS”
in the “9. Technical and consumer information”
section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|